FDMSRcRetail Class

Properties   Methods   Events   Config Settings   Errors  

The FDMSRcRetail class is an advanced tool used to authorize credit cards in a Retail environment, where the customer is purchasing products or services in person. This class makes authorizing these types of transactions very easy. Supported Industry Types include retail stores and restaurants.

Syntax

FDMSRcRetail

Remarks

This class connects to the First Data Merchant Services (FDMS) processor, by way of the Datawire VXN transaction transport network. Transactions originating with these classs go through Datawire, to the FDMS processor where the transaction is authorized. The result is then returned back through Datawire and received by the class. This class can be integrated into web pages or stand-alone Point Of Sale applications. Because all SSL communications are handled inside the class, any application or web page can be deployed without the need for expensive dedicated SSL servers.

The FDMSRcRetail class makes authorizing Card-Present transactions (where the customer's card is swiped through a card reader) very easy by adding an additional layer of abstraction between the programmer and the protocol. There is no need to deal with raw sockets, TLS/SSL handshakes, or data packet formatting. The steps to setting up the class and authorizing a transaction are outlined below:

Datawire Setup

First, you must register and activate your account with Datawire. FDMS Rapid Connect will provide you with the following values:

The FDMSRegister class must be used to activate the merchant and receive a DatawireId. Once you acquire the DatawireId and receive your transaction URLs through ServiceDiscovery, you may begin to authorize transactions. For instance:

FDMSRegister.FDMSPlatform = FdmsregisterFDMSPlatforms.fpRapidConnect; FDMSRegister.MerchantNumber = "000000999990"; FDMSRegister.MerchantTerminalNumber = "555555"; FDMSRegister.Config("GroupId=20001"); //Required for Rapid Connect FDMSRegister.TransactionNumber = "1"; //any unique number will do. FDMSRegister.URL = "https://stagingsupport.datawire.net/staging_expresso/SRS.do"; FDMSRegister.Register(); FDMSRegister.TransactionNumber = FDMSRegister.TransactionNumber + 1; FDMSRegister.Activate(); FDMSRegister.ServiceDiscovery(FDMSRegister.PrimaryDiscoveryURL); for (int i = 0; i < FDMSRegister.ServiceProviders.Length; i++) { FDMSRegister.Ping(FDMSRegister.ServiceProviders[i]); Console.WriteLine(FDMSRegister.ServiceProviders[i] + " = " + FDMSRegister.PingResponseTime); }

To authorize a credit, debit, ebt or FSA/HSA card set the MerchantId, MerchantTerminalNumber, and GroupId properties with the values supplied by FDMS Rapid Connect. Set the DatawireId property with the value retrieved by the FDMSRegister class after activating your merchant account. Set the URL property with one of the URLs you retrieved during ServiceDiscovery.

Transaction Processing

To begin processing transactions first set the required merchant values. For instance: retail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail; retail.TPPID = "AAA000"; retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001"; retail.MerchantId = "1234"; retail.GroupId = "20001"; retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566"; retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc"; retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN";

Next specify transaction specific information. These values uniquely identify the transaction to Datawire and FDMS. retail.STAN = "112"; retail.TransactionNumber = "1234"; retail.OrderNumber = "123"; retail.ReferenceNumber = "123"; Then specify customer card and address information along with the transaction amount: retail.Card.MagneticStripe = "B4012000033330026^FDCS TEST CARD /VISA^170410054321000000000000000 150 A"; retail.Card.EntryDataSource = EntryDataSources.edsTrack1; retail.TransactionAmount = "1200"; //$12.00

Finally, submit the transaction by calling the Sale method.

retail.Sale();

The ResponseCode property indicates the result of the transaction. A code of 000 indicates success. For all other values please see the Response Codes section. Additional Response properties such as ResponseApprovalCode, ResponseAuthorizedAmount, ResponseText, ResponseAVSResult, ResponseCVVResult, and more, provide further details about the transaction response.

To perform subsequent operations on a transaction, such as calling Reverse to reverse a Sale, or calling Capture to capture a previous AuthOnly transaction the GetDetailAggregate method must be used to get details about the original transaction. This aggregate must be stored securely, it will contain cardholder information that is required for subsequent transactions. For instance:

retail.AuthOnly(); //Save the detail aggregate to use with Capture string aggregate = retail.GetDetailAggregate(); //The aggregate must then be stored securely. //At a later time the aggregate is retrieved in order to perform a capture. //Capture retail = new Fdmsrcretail(); ... //Specify the detail aggregate from the original transaction retail.SetDetailAggregate(aggregate); retail.Capture();

Transaction Types

In addition to a basic sale transaction, additional transaction types exist for other common operations. Not all transaction types are applicable for all classs. Check the method list for applicable transaction types.

AuthOnly An authorization that must be Captured later.
BalanceInquiry Inquire about available balance.
Capture Captures a previous AuthOnly transaction for settlement.
Credit Credits funds to the cardholder. This is not based on a previous transaction.
Reverse Reverse a previous transaction. This is also used for timeout reversals.
Sale A basic sale, no other steps are required to complete the payment.
VerifyCard Verifies that a card is valid.
HostTotals Requests a Host Totals Report for a particular day.
VoucherClear Performs an online force-post entry of a voice-authorized Food Benefit or eWIC transaction.

Note: FDMS Rapid Connect is a host capture system. No explicit calls are needed to settle or otherwise manage the batch.

Gratuity for Restaurant Transactions:

In order to add gratuity the transaction may be authorized using AuthOnly and then Captured for a different amount that includes the tip. Gratuity cannot be added later to a Sale transaction. Consult FDMS for any applicable limits on the additional amount being captured.

Level 2 Transactions

The values required for Level 2 transaction depend on the card type. The following tables indicate which properties are valid for what card type:

American Express

Visa MasterCard

Property List


The following is the full list of the properties of the class with short descriptions. Click on the links for further details.

ApplicationIdIdentifies the merchant application to the Datawire System.
InstallmentDescriptionThe merchant's description of an Installment Bill Payment Transaction.
InstallmentInvoiceNumberThe Invoice Number of an Installment Bill Payment Transaction.
InstallmentTypeThe type of the Installment payment.
MerchantAdviceCodeThis property contains a code which may be returned by the issuer to provide additional information for a card not present transaction.
MITAmountThe amount of the Recurring or Installment payment.
MITAmountTypeIdentifies the type of the Recurring or Installment Payment amount.
MITFrequencyThis property indicates the frequency of a Recurring or Installment payment.
MITPaymentCurrencyContains the Installment Payment Currency represented as a 3 digit value.
MITRecurringPaymentTypeThis property contains the type of Recurring Payment.
MITRegistrationRefNumThis property contains a unique Reference Number for the Recurring Payment transaction.
MITSequenceIndicatorIdentifies the sequence of the transactions when multiple Installment payments will be submitted.
MITTotalPaymentAmountThis property contains the Total Installment Amount.
MITTotalPaymentCountThe number of Recurring payments or Installments per the Cardholder agreement with the Merchant.
MITUniqueIDThis property is used to uniquely identify each of the Recurring or Installment Payment.
MITValidationFlagIndicates the validation source for the validity of a transaction.
MITValidationRefThis property contains a cryptogram generated by the validation source for each cardholder account, for an Issuer to validate a transaction.
TransactionIndicatorSpecifies the type of Bill Payment being made.
CardTypeType of credit card being used in this transaction.
CardCVVDataThree digit security code on back of card (optional).
CardCVVPresenceIndicates the presence of the card verification value.
CardEntryDataSourceThis property contains a 1-character code identifying the source of the customer data.
CardExpMonthExpiration month of the credit card specified in Number .
CardExpYearExpiration year of the credit card specified in Number .
CardIsEncryptedDetermines whether data set to the Number or MagneticStripe properties is validated.
CardMagneticStripeTrack data read off of the card's magnetic stripe.
CardNumberCustomer's credit card number for the transaction.
CashBackOptional cash back amount to return to the customer.
CustomerAddressThe customer's billing address.
CustomerZipCustomer's zip code (or postal code if outside of the USA).
DatawireIdIdentifies the merchant to the Datawire System.
EMVDataThe EMV Data returned from a Pin Pad after reading an EMV card.
GroupIdThe Id assigned by FDMS to identify the merchant or group of merchants.
IndustryTypeThe merchant's industry type.
Level2CustomerReferenceNumberThe reference number or order number to be reported as part of the Purchase Card data.
Level2DestinationCountryCodeThis property represents the country code of the location the items in this purchase are being delivered to.
Level2DestinationPostalCodeThis property contains the postal or zip code of the location the item(s) in this purchase are being delivered to.
Level2DiscountAmountThis property contains the discount amount for the purchase.
Level2DutyAmountThis property contains the duty amount for this purchase.
Level2FreightAmountThis property contains the amount for freight included in this purchase.
Level2MerchantTaxIdThis property should contain the Tax Id collected by the merchant for this transaction.
Level2ProductDescriptionThis property should contain a description of an item purchased with this card.
Level2PurchaseIdentifierThis property represents the data used by the merchant or customer to identify the purchase.
Level2ShipFromPostalCodeThe postal or zip code the item(s) in this purchase are to be shipped from.
Level2TaxAmountThis property contains the portion of the transaction amount that represents the tax.
Level2TaxIndicatorThis property indicates the taxable status of the transaction.
MerchantIdA unique Id used to identify the merchant within the FDMS and Datawire systems.
MerchantServicePhoneThe merchant's phone number, used to assist cardholders.
MerchantTerminalNumberUsed to identify a unique terminal within a merchant location.
MerchantURLThe URL of the site performing the ECommerce transaction.
OrderNumberA merchant assigned order number to uniquely reference the transaction.
ProxyAuthSchemeThis property is used to tell the class which type of authorization to perform when connecting to the proxy.
ProxyAutoDetectThis property tells the class whether or not to automatically detect and use proxy system settings, if available.
ProxyPasswordThis property contains a password if authentication is to be used for the proxy.
ProxyPortThis property contains the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) port for the proxy Server (default 80).
ProxyServerIf a proxy Server is given, then the HTTP request is sent to the proxy instead of the server otherwise specified.
ProxySSLThis property determines when to use a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) for the connection to the proxy.
ProxyUserThis property contains a username if authentication is to be used for the proxy.
ReferenceNumberA value assigned by the merchant to uniquely reference a transaction and any subsequent related transactions.
ResponseApprovalCodeThe Approval Code returned from the server after a successful authorization.
ResponseAuthorizedAmountThe amount actually charged to the card.
ResponseAuthorizingNetworkIdThis property indicates the network Id as returned by the host, if available.
ResponseAuthorizingNetworkNameThis property indicates the authorizing network name as returned by the host, when available.
ResponseAVSResultContains the Address Verification System result code.
ResponseBalanceContains the remaining available balance left on the card.
ResponseCardLevelResultThis property is only applicable to Visa card.
ResponseCodeContains the 3 digit response code indicating success or reason of failure.
ResponseCommercialCardIndicates whether the credit card charged is a corporate commercial card.
ResponseCVVResultContains the returned CVV result code (if CVV data was sent in the request).
ResponseDatawireReturnCodeContains an error code providing more details about the DatawireStatus received.
ResponseDatawireStatusStatus of the communication with Datawire.
ResponseEMVDataContains the EMV data returns in the response (if any).
ResponsePOSDataThis property holds transaction specific information returned by the issuer (if any).
ResponseReturnedACIReturned Authorization Characteristics Indicator contains CPS qualification status.
ResponseRoutingIndicatorIndicates whether the transaction was processed as Credit or Debit.
ResponseSettlementDateThe date the transaction will be settled in the format MMDD.
ResponseTextThis property may hold additional text which describes the reason for a decline, the property in error, etc.
ResponseTransactionDateThe transaction date returned from the server in yyyyMMddHHmmss format.
ResponseTransactionIdCard issuer's Transaction Reference Number.
ReversalTransactionTypeThe type of transaction to reverse.
ReversalTypeThe type of reversal.
SettlementModeIndicates whether the class uses Host Capture (0) or Terminal Capture (1) system.
SSLAcceptServerCertEncodedThis is the certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded).
SSLCertEncodedThis is the certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded).
SSLCertStoreThis is the name of the certificate store for the client certificate.
SSLCertStorePasswordIf the type of certificate store requires a password, this property is used to specify the password needed to open the certificate store.
SSLCertStoreTypeThis is the type of certificate store for this certificate.
SSLCertSubjectThis is the subject of the certificate used for client authentication.
SSLProviderThis specifies the SSL/TLS implementation to use.
SSLServerCertEncodedThis is the certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded).
STANThe merchant assigned System Trace Audit Number(STAN).
TimeoutA timeout for the class.
TPPIDThird Party Processor Identifier assigned by FDMS.
TransactionAmountThe transaction amount to be authorized.
TransactionNumberUniquely identifies the transaction.
URLLocation of the Datawire server to which transactions are sent.
VisaIdentifierAdditional merchant identification field used when authorizing Visa transactions.

Method List


The following is the full list of the methods of the class with short descriptions. Click on the links for further details.

AuthOnlyPerforms an authorization request.
BalanceInquiryPerforms a Balance Inquiry Request using the specified Card data.
CaptureCaptures a previously authorized transaction.
ConfigSets or retrieves a configuration setting.
CreditSubmits a credit transaction.
GetDetailAggregateReturns a detail aggregate containing details of this transaction, which is used for Capture or Reverse transactions or settlement when using Terminal Capture mode.
HostTotalsPerforms a Host Totals request.
InterruptInterrupts the current action.
ResetClears all properties to their default values.
ReverseReverses a transaction.
SalePerforms a sale transaction.
SetDetailAggregateSpecifies the detail aggregate before calling Capture or Reverse.
VerifyCardPerforms a zero dollar verification of the card.

Event List


The following is the full list of the events fired by the class with short descriptions. Click on the links for further details.

ConnectedThis event is fired immediately after a connection completes (or fails).
DataPacketInFired when receiving a data packet from the transaction server.
DataPacketOutFired when sending a data packet to the transaction server.
DisconnectedThis event is fired when a connection is closed.
ErrorFired when information is available about errors during data delivery.
SSLServerAuthenticationFired after the server presents its certificate to the client.
SSLStatusFired when secure connection progress messages are available.
StatusShows the progress of the FDMS/Datawire connection.

Config Settings


The following is a list of config settings for the class with short descriptions. Click on the links for further details.

ACIAuthorization Characteristics Indicator.
AllowPartialAuthsIndicates whether partial authorizations are supported.
AltMerchantAddressThe alternative merchant address.
AltMerchantCityThe alternative merchant city.
AltMerchantCountryCodeThe alternative merchant country code.
AltMerchantEmailThe alternative merchant email.
AltMerchantNameThe alternative merchant name.
AltMerchantStateThe alternative merchant state.
AltMerchantZipThe alternative merchant zip code.
AuthIndicatorIndicate the type of authorization requested.
AuthorizationIndicatorIndicates whether the authorization is a final authorization.
AuthSourceIndicates the source of the decision for the Visa transaction.
CardInputModeThe method used to input the card details.
CardTypeSpecifies the type of card.
CITMITFrameIndicatorCIT/MIT Frame Indicator (Mastercard only).
ClientTimeoutIndicates timeout client application will wait for response.
CurrencyCodeCurrency Code for this transaction.
DebugTraceWhether to enable debug logging.
DeviceTypeIndicatorDefines the form factor used at the POS for MasterCard PayPass transactions.
DurationLength of hotel stay in days.
ECIIdentifies the security level of the ECommerce transaction.
EMVOnlineKSNClear-text Key Sequence Number for EMV Online PIN transactions.
EMVOnlinePINDUKPT DES encrypted PIN block for EMV Online PIN transactions.
ExtraChargesList of extra charges for hotel transactions.
FolioNumberThe Folio or Room Agreement number assigned by the hotel.
GetTransArmorTokenAllows you to retrieve a TransArmor Token for a specified card.
HostTotalsPasswordThe merchant password required in Host Totals requests.
HostTotalsTypeIndicates the Host Totals Report type requested.
IsCOFScheduledIndicates whether the stored credential transaction was scheduled.
IsDeferredAuthIndicates whether the transaction is a Deferred Authorization.
IsOnlineRefundIndicates whether a transaction is Online Refund Authorization.
LocalTransactionDateThe local date of the transaction.
LodgingReferenceNumberA reference number assigned by the hotel/lodging establishment.
MerchantCategoryCodeThe 4 digit Merchant Category Code (MCC).
MITTransactionIdTransaction Id associated with the original authorization of a Credential on File Transaction.
MOTOIndicatorIndicates whether the transaction is Mail Order or Telephone Order.
POSConditionCodeThe POS condition code.
POSIdIdentifies the specific point of sale device.
ProgramIndicatorIndicates the reason for the charge in a hotel transaction.
RoomNumberThe Room Number assigned by the hotel.
RoomRateThe daily room rate in a hotel transaction.
StoredCredentialIndicatorIndicates the usage of stored credentials.
SupportPINLessDebitIndicates whether the terminal can support swiped PINLess Debit transactions.
SurchargeAmountIndicates Merchant Surcharge/Transaction Fee Amount charged to the customer to account for acquirer-assessed surcharge.
TerminalCardCapabilityThe terminal's card capture capability.
TerminalEntryCapabilityThe terminal's entry mode capability.
TerminalLocationIndicatorThe terminal's location.
TerminalPinCapabilityThe terminal's PIN capability.
TerminalTaxCapabilityThe terminal's ability to prompt for tax.
TotalAuthorizedAmountTotal Authorized Amount.
TransactionInitiationIndicates how the transaction was initiated.
TransArmorKeySpecifies the TransArmor key used to perform the encryption.
TransArmorKeyIdSpecifies the Id of the TransArmor key used to perform the encryption.
TransArmorModeSpecifies the TransArmor Security Level to use.
TransArmorProviderIdThe Id of the Provider that issued a TransArmorToken.
TransArmorTokenA TransArmor Token used in place of a card number or magnetic stripe data.
TransArmorTokenTypeThe FDMS assigned token type.
TransArmorTokenTypeSpecifies the type of TransArmor token that will be used.
TransArmorUpdateIndicatorIndicates whether your TransArmorKey needs to be updated.
UpdateTransArmorKeyAllows you to update your TransArmor Key.
UTCTransactionDateThe UTC date of the transaction.
VisaCheckoutIndicatorIndicates whether the transaction is a Visa Checkout transaction.
VoiceApprovalCodeThe voice approval.
AcceptEncodingUsed to tell the server which types of content encodings the client supports.
AllowHTTPCompressionThis property enables HTTP compression for receiving data.
AllowHTTPFallbackWhether HTTP/2 connections are permitted to fallback to HTTP/1.1.
AppendWhether to append data to LocalFile.
AuthorizationThe Authorization string to be sent to the server.
BytesTransferredContains the number of bytes transferred in the response data.
ChunkSizeSpecifies the chunk size in bytes when using chunked encoding.
CompressHTTPRequestSet to true to compress the body of a PUT or POST request.
EncodeURLIf set to True the URL will be encoded by the class.
FollowRedirectsDetermines what happens when the server issues a redirect.
GetOn302RedirectIf set to True the class will perform a GET on the new location.
HTTP2HeadersWithoutIndexingHTTP2 headers that should not update the dynamic header table with incremental indexing.
HTTPVersionThe version of HTTP used by the class.
IfModifiedSinceA date determining the maximum age of the desired document.
KeepAliveDetermines whether the HTTP connection is closed after completion of the request.
KerberosSPNThe Service Principal Name for the Kerberos Domain Controller.
LogLevelThe level of detail that is logged.
MaxRedirectAttemptsLimits the number of redirects that are followed in a request.
NegotiatedHTTPVersionThe negotiated HTTP version.
OtherHeadersOther headers as determined by the user (optional).
ProxyAuthorizationThe authorization string to be sent to the proxy server.
ProxyAuthSchemeThe authorization scheme to be used for the proxy.
ProxyPasswordA password if authentication is to be used for the proxy.
ProxyPortPort for the proxy server (default 80).
ProxyServerName or IP address of a proxy server (optional).
ProxyUserA user name if authentication is to be used for the proxy.
SentHeadersThe full set of headers as sent by the client.
StatusCodeThe status code of the last response from the server.
StatusLineThe first line of the last response from the server.
TransferredDataThe contents of the last response from the server.
TransferredDataLimitThe maximum number of incoming bytes to be stored by the class.
TransferredHeadersThe full set of headers as received from the server.
TransferredRequestThe full request as sent by the client.
UseChunkedEncodingEnables or Disables HTTP chunked encoding for transfers.
UseIDNsWhether to encode hostnames to internationalized domain names.
UsePlatformHTTPClientWhether or not to use the platform HTTP client.
UseProxyAutoConfigURLWhether to use a Proxy auto-config file when attempting a connection.
UserAgentInformation about the user agent (browser).
ConnectionTimeoutSets a separate timeout value for establishing a connection.
ConnectionTimeoutSets a separate timeout value for establishing a connection.
FirewallAutoDetectTells the class whether or not to automatically detect and use firewall system settings, if available.
FirewallAutoDetectTells the class whether or not to automatically detect and use firewall system settings, if available.
FirewallHostName or IP address of firewall (optional).
FirewallHostName or IP address of firewall (optional).
FirewallPasswordPassword to be used if authentication is to be used when connecting through the firewall.
FirewallPasswordPassword to be used if authentication is to be used when connecting through the firewall.
FirewallPortThe TCP port for the FirewallHost;.
FirewallPortThe TCP port for the FirewallHost;.
FirewallTypeDetermines the type of firewall to connect through.
FirewallTypeDetermines the type of firewall to connect through.
FirewallUserA user name if authentication is to be used connecting through a firewall.
FirewallUserA user name if authentication is to be used connecting through a firewall.
KeepAliveIntervalThe retry interval, in milliseconds, to be used when a TCP keep-alive packet is sent and no response is received.
KeepAliveIntervalThe retry interval, in milliseconds, to be used when a TCP keep-alive packet is sent and no response is received.
KeepAliveRetryCountThe number of keep-alive packets to be sent before the remotehost is considered disconnected.
KeepAliveRetryCountThe number of keep-alive packets to be sent before the remotehost is considered disconnected.
KeepAliveTimeThe inactivity time in milliseconds before a TCP keep-alive packet is sent.
KeepAliveTimeThe inactivity time in milliseconds before a TCP keep-alive packet is sent.
LingerWhen set to True, connections are terminated gracefully.
LingerWhen set to True, connections are terminated gracefully.
LingerTimeTime in seconds to have the connection linger.
LingerTimeTime in seconds to have the connection linger.
LocalHostThe name of the local host through which connections are initiated or accepted.
LocalHostThe name of the local host through which connections are initiated or accepted.
LocalPortThe port in the local host where the class binds.
LocalPortThe port in the local host where the class binds.
MaxLineLengthThe maximum amount of data to accumulate when no EOL is found.
MaxLineLengthThe maximum amount of data to accumulate when no EOL is found.
MaxTransferRateThe transfer rate limit in bytes per second.
MaxTransferRateThe transfer rate limit in bytes per second.
ProxyExceptionsListA semicolon separated list of hosts and IPs to bypass when using a proxy.
ProxyExceptionsListA semicolon separated list of hosts and IPs to bypass when using a proxy.
TCPKeepAliveDetermines whether or not the keep alive socket option is enabled.
TCPKeepAliveDetermines whether or not the keep alive socket option is enabled.
TcpNoDelayWhether or not to delay when sending packets.
TcpNoDelayWhether or not to delay when sending packets.
UseIPv6Whether to use IPv6.
UseIPv6Whether to use IPv6.
LogSSLPacketsControls whether SSL packets are logged when using the internal security API.
LogSSLPacketsControls whether SSL packets are logged when using the internal security API.
OpenSSLCADirThe path to a directory containing CA certificates.
OpenSSLCADirThe path to a directory containing CA certificates.
OpenSSLCAFileName of the file containing the list of CA's trusted by your application.
OpenSSLCAFileName of the file containing the list of CA's trusted by your application.
OpenSSLCipherListA string that controls the ciphers to be used by SSL.
OpenSSLCipherListA string that controls the ciphers to be used by SSL.
OpenSSLPrngSeedDataThe data to seed the pseudo random number generator (PRNG).
OpenSSLPrngSeedDataThe data to seed the pseudo random number generator (PRNG).
ReuseSSLSessionDetermines if the SSL session is reused.
ReuseSSLSessionDetermines if the SSL session is reused.
SSLCACertFilePathsThe paths to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.
SSLCACertFilePathsThe paths to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.
SSLCACertsA newline separated list of CA certificate to use during SSL client authentication.
SSLCACertsA newline separated list of CA certificate to use during SSL client authentication.
SSLCipherStrengthThe minimum cipher strength used for bulk encryption.
SSLCipherStrengthThe minimum cipher strength used for bulk encryption.
SSLEnabledCipherSuitesThe cipher suite to be used in an SSL negotiation.
SSLEnabledCipherSuitesThe cipher suite to be used in an SSL negotiation.
SSLEnabledProtocolsUsed to enable/disable the supported security protocols.
SSLEnabledProtocolsUsed to enable/disable the supported security protocols.
SSLEnableRenegotiationWhether the renegotiation_info SSL extension is supported.
SSLEnableRenegotiationWhether the renegotiation_info SSL extension is supported.
SSLIncludeCertChainWhether the entire certificate chain is included in the SSLServerAuthentication event.
SSLIncludeCertChainWhether the entire certificate chain is included in the SSLServerAuthentication event.
SSLKeyLogFileThe location of a file where per-session secrets are written for debugging purposes.
SSLKeyLogFileThe location of a file where per-session secrets are written for debugging purposes.
SSLNegotiatedCipherReturns the negotiated cipher suite.
SSLNegotiatedCipherReturns the negotiated cipher suite.
SSLNegotiatedCipherStrengthReturns the negotiated cipher suite strength.
SSLNegotiatedCipherStrengthReturns the negotiated cipher suite strength.
SSLNegotiatedCipherSuiteReturns the negotiated cipher suite.
SSLNegotiatedCipherSuiteReturns the negotiated cipher suite.
SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeReturns the negotiated key exchange algorithm.
SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeReturns the negotiated key exchange algorithm.
SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrengthReturns the negotiated key exchange algorithm strength.
SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrengthReturns the negotiated key exchange algorithm strength.
SSLNegotiatedVersionReturns the negotiated protocol version.
SSLNegotiatedVersionReturns the negotiated protocol version.
SSLSecurityFlagsFlags that control certificate verification.
SSLSecurityFlagsFlags that control certificate verification.
SSLServerCACertsA newline separated list of CA certificate to use during SSL server certificate validation.
SSLServerCACertsA newline separated list of CA certificate to use during SSL server certificate validation.
TLS12SignatureAlgorithmsDefines the allowed TLS 1.2 signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal.
TLS12SignatureAlgorithmsDefines the allowed TLS 1.2 signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal.
TLS12SupportedGroupsThe supported groups for ECC.
TLS12SupportedGroupsThe supported groups for ECC.
TLS13KeyShareGroupsThe groups for which to pregenerate key shares.
TLS13KeyShareGroupsThe groups for which to pregenerate key shares.
TLS13SignatureAlgorithmsThe allowed certificate signature algorithms.
TLS13SignatureAlgorithmsThe allowed certificate signature algorithms.
TLS13SupportedGroupsThe supported groups for (EC)DHE key exchange.
TLS13SupportedGroupsThe supported groups for (EC)DHE key exchange.
AbsoluteTimeoutDetermines whether timeouts are inactivity timeouts or absolute timeouts.
AbsoluteTimeoutDetermines whether timeouts are inactivity timeouts or absolute timeouts.
FirewallDataUsed to send extra data to the firewall.
FirewallDataUsed to send extra data to the firewall.
InBufferSizeThe size in bytes of the incoming queue of the socket.
InBufferSizeThe size in bytes of the incoming queue of the socket.
OutBufferSizeThe size in bytes of the outgoing queue of the socket.
OutBufferSizeThe size in bytes of the outgoing queue of the socket.
BuildInfoInformation about the product's build.
CodePageThe system code page used for Unicode to Multibyte translations.
LicenseInfoInformation about the current license.
MaskSensitiveWhether sensitive data is masked in log messages.
ProcessIdleEventsWhether the class uses its internal event loop to process events when the main thread is idle.
SelectWaitMillisThe length of time in milliseconds the class will wait when DoEvents is called if there are no events to process.
UseInternalSecurityAPIWhether or not to use the system security libraries or an internal implementation.

ApplicationId Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Identifies the merchant application to the Datawire System.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetApplicationId();
int SetApplicationId(const char* lpszApplicationId); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetApplicationId();
INT SetApplicationId(LPCWSTR lpszApplicationId);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getapplicationid(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setapplicationid(void* lpObj, const char* lpszApplicationId);
QString GetApplicationId();
int SetApplicationId(QString qsApplicationId);

Default Value

"NSOFTDIRECTPXML"

Remarks

The Application Id identifies the application that has generated and is sending the transaction. This is a 15 character alphanumeric code that identifies each application and is provided by the Datawire Secure Transport Vendor Integration Team

This property may be validated along with the DatawireId as connection credentials.

The default value of this property is a value used for testing with Rapid Connect. You may be required to have a new ApplicationId assigned for the software you create with this class.

Data Type

String

InstallmentDescription Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The merchant's description of an Installment Bill Payment Transaction.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetInstallmentDescription();
int SetInstallmentDescription(const char* lpszInstallmentDescription); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetInstallmentDescription();
INT SetInstallmentDescription(LPCWSTR lpszInstallmentDescription);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getinstallmentdescription(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setinstallmentdescription(void* lpObj, const char* lpszInstallmentDescription);
QString GetInstallmentDescription();
int SetInstallmentDescription(QString qsInstallmentDescription);

Default Value

""

Remarks

The merchant's description of an Installment Bill Payment Transaction.

This field is only sent in an 'Installment' or 'Recurring' transaction.

The maximum length of this field is 15 characters.

Data Type

String

InstallmentInvoiceNumber Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The Invoice Number of an Installment Bill Payment Transaction.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetInstallmentInvoiceNumber();
int SetInstallmentInvoiceNumber(const char* lpszInstallmentInvoiceNumber); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetInstallmentInvoiceNumber();
INT SetInstallmentInvoiceNumber(LPCWSTR lpszInstallmentInvoiceNumber);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getinstallmentinvoicenumber(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setinstallmentinvoicenumber(void* lpObj, const char* lpszInstallmentInvoiceNumber);
QString GetInstallmentInvoiceNumber();
int SetInstallmentInvoiceNumber(QString qsInstallmentInvoiceNumber);

Default Value

""

Remarks

The Invoice Number of an Installment Bill Payment Transaction.

This field is only sent in an 'Installment' or 'Recurring' transaction.

The maximum length of this field is 12 characters.

Data Type

String

InstallmentType Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The type of the Installment payment.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetInstallmentType();
int SetInstallmentType(int iInstallmentType); Unicode (Windows) INT GetInstallmentType();
INT SetInstallmentType(INT iInstallmentType);

Possible Values

IT_UNSPECIFIED(0), 
IT_MERCHANT(1),
IT_THIRD_PARTY(2),
IT_ISSUER(3)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getinstallmenttype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setinstallmenttype(void* lpObj, int iInstallmentType);
int GetInstallmentType();
int SetInstallmentType(int iInstallmentType);

Default Value

0

Remarks

The type of the Installment payment.

This field is required for all Discover, Diners (including JCB - US Domestic) Installment transactions TransactionIndicator value 3 (tiInstallment) and it is applicable to ECommerce, MOTO, and Retail transactions. Possible values are:

0 (itUnspecified - default) Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request.
1 (itMerchant) Merchant - Merchant Installment Payment
2 (itThirdParty) ThirdParty - Third Party Installment Payment
3 (itIssuer) Issuer - Issuer Installment Payment

Data Type

Integer

MerchantAdviceCode Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property contains a code which may be returned by the issuer to provide additional information for a card not present transaction.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetMerchantAdviceCode();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetMerchantAdviceCode();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmerchantadvicecode(void* lpObj);
QString GetMerchantAdviceCode();

Default Value

""

Remarks

This field contains a code which may be returned by the issuer to provide additional information for a card not present transaction.

The following values are defined:

Response CodeMeaning
01 New account information available
02 Try again later (must wait 72 hours before sending the recurring transaction again)
03 Do not try again
04 Token requirements are not fulfilled for this token type
05 Card account closed or fraud
06 Cardholder canceled recurring payment
07 Cancel specific payment
21 Do not honor - Issuer has blocked recurring payment service / Payment Cancellation
22 Merchant does not qualify for product code
24 Retry after 1 hour
25 Retry after 24 hours
26 Retry after 2 days
27 Retry after 4 days
28 Retry after 6 days
29 Retry after 8 days
30 Retry after 10 days

This property is read-only.

Data Type

String

MITAmount Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The amount of the Recurring or Installment payment.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetMITAmount();
int SetMITAmount(const char* lpszMITAmount); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetMITAmount();
INT SetMITAmount(LPCWSTR lpszMITAmount);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitamount(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitamount(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMITAmount);
QString GetMITAmount();
int SetMITAmount(QString qsMITAmount);

Default Value

""

Remarks

The amount of the Recurring or Installment payment.

This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa', 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'.

This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.

The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.

Data Type

String

MITAmountType Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Identifies the type of the Recurring or Installment Payment amount.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetMITAmountType();
int SetMITAmountType(int iMITAmountType); Unicode (Windows) INT GetMITAmountType();
INT SetMITAmountType(INT iMITAmountType);

Possible Values

AT_UNSPECIFIED(0), 
AT_FIXED(1),
AT_VARIABLE(2)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitamounttype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitamounttype(void* lpObj, int iMITAmountType);
int GetMITAmountType();
int SetMITAmountType(int iMITAmountType);

Default Value

0

Remarks

Identifies the type of the Recurring or Installment Payment amount.

The following values are defined:

0 (atUnspecified - default) Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request.
1 (atFixed) Fixed - subscription (e.g. monthly newspaper subscription)
2 (atVariable) Variable - standing order (e.g. monthly utility payment)

Data Type

Integer

MITFrequency Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property indicates the frequency of a Recurring or Installment payment.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetMITFrequency();
int SetMITFrequency(int iMITFrequency); Unicode (Windows) INT GetMITFrequency();
INT SetMITFrequency(INT iMITFrequency);

Possible Values

FREQ_UNSPECIFIED(0), 
FREQ_DAILY(1),
FREQ_WEEKLY(2),
FREQ_BIWEEKLY(3),
FREQ_MONTHLY(4),
FREQ_QUARTERLY(5),
FREQ_BIANNUALLY(6),
FREQ_ANNUALLY(7),
FREQ_UNSCHEDULED(8),
FREQ_TEN_DAYS(9),
FREQ_TWICE_WEEKLY(10),
FREQ_EVERY_TWO_MONTHS(11),
FREQ_TRIMESTER(12)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitfrequency(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitfrequency(void* lpObj, int iMITFrequency);
int GetMITFrequency();
int SetMITFrequency(int iMITFrequency);

Default Value

0

Remarks

This field indicates the frequency of a Recurring or Installment payment.

The following values are defined:

0 (freqUnspecified - default) Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request.
1 (freqDaily) Daily
2 (freqWeekly) Weekly
3 (freqBiweekly) Biweekly / Fortnightly
4 (freqMonthly) Monthly
5 (freqQuarterly) Quarterly
6 (freqBiannually) Half-Yearly (Biannually)
7 (freqAnnually) Annually
8 (freqUnscheduled) Unscheduled (Type of MIT)
9 (freqTenDays) Ten days
10 (freqTwiceWeekly) Twice weekly
11 (freqEveryTwoMonths) Every two months
12 (freqTrimester) Trimester

This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa', 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'.

When the Card Type is 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners', the valid values are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8.

For Visa Recurring transactions, valid values are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12.

For Visa Installment transactions, valid values are 2, 3, or 4.

Data Type

Integer

MITPaymentCurrency Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Contains the Installment Payment Currency represented as a 3 digit value.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetMITPaymentCurrency();
int SetMITPaymentCurrency(const char* lpszMITPaymentCurrency); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetMITPaymentCurrency();
INT SetMITPaymentCurrency(LPCWSTR lpszMITPaymentCurrency);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitpaymentcurrency(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitpaymentcurrency(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMITPaymentCurrency);
QString GetMITPaymentCurrency();
int SetMITPaymentCurrency(QString qsMITPaymentCurrency);

Default Value

"840"

Remarks

Contains the Installment Payment Currency represented as a 3 digit value.

This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa'. For US Dollars, use "840".

Data Type

String

MITRecurringPaymentType Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property contains the type of Recurring Payment.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetMITRecurringPaymentType();
int SetMITRecurringPaymentType(int iMITRecurringPaymentType); Unicode (Windows) INT GetMITRecurringPaymentType();
INT SetMITRecurringPaymentType(INT iMITRecurringPaymentType);

Possible Values

RPT_UNSPECIFIED(0), 
RPT_REGISTRATION(1),
RPT_SUBSEQUENT(2),
RPT_MODIFICATION(3),
RPT_CANCELLATION(4)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitrecurringpaymenttype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitrecurringpaymenttype(void* lpObj, int iMITRecurringPaymentType);
int GetMITRecurringPaymentType();
int SetMITRecurringPaymentType(int iMITRecurringPaymentType);

Default Value

0

Remarks

This field contains the type of Recurring Payment.

This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa'. The following values are defined:

0 (rptUnspecified - default) Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request.
1 (rptRegistration) Registration / first transaction
2 (rptSubsequent) Subsequent transaction
3 (rptModification) Modification
4 (rptCancellation) Cancellation

Data Type

Integer

MITRegistrationRefNum Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property contains a unique Reference Number for the Recurring Payment transaction.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetMITRegistrationRefNum();
int SetMITRegistrationRefNum(const char* lpszMITRegistrationRefNum); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetMITRegistrationRefNum();
INT SetMITRegistrationRefNum(LPCWSTR lpszMITRegistrationRefNum);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitregistrationrefnum(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitregistrationrefnum(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMITRegistrationRefNum);
QString GetMITRegistrationRefNum();
int SetMITRegistrationRefNum(QString qsMITRegistrationRefNum);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This field contains a unique Reference Number for the Recurring Payment transaction.

This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa'.

The maximum length of this field is 35 characters.

Data Type

String

MITSequenceIndicator Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Identifies the sequence of the transactions when multiple Installment payments will be submitted.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetMITSequenceIndicator();
int SetMITSequenceIndicator(int iMITSequenceIndicator); Unicode (Windows) INT GetMITSequenceIndicator();
INT SetMITSequenceIndicator(INT iMITSequenceIndicator);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitsequenceindicator(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitsequenceindicator(void* lpObj, int iMITSequenceIndicator);
int GetMITSequenceIndicator();
int SetMITSequenceIndicator(int iMITSequenceIndicator);

Default Value

0

Remarks

Identifies the sequence of the transactions when multiple Installment payments will be submitted.

This field should be populated in ascending order and is only applicable when Card Type is 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'.

Valid values for this field are numbers from 0 to 99.

Data Type

Integer

MITTotalPaymentAmount Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property contains the Total Installment Amount.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetMITTotalPaymentAmount();
int SetMITTotalPaymentAmount(const char* lpszMITTotalPaymentAmount); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetMITTotalPaymentAmount();
INT SetMITTotalPaymentAmount(LPCWSTR lpszMITTotalPaymentAmount);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmittotalpaymentamount(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmittotalpaymentamount(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMITTotalPaymentAmount);
QString GetMITTotalPaymentAmount();
int SetMITTotalPaymentAmount(QString qsMITTotalPaymentAmount);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This field contains the Total Installment Amount.

This field is only applicable for Visa Installment transactions. Note : The total amount cannot exceed USD 500,000.

This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.

The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.

Data Type

String

MITTotalPaymentCount Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The number of Recurring payments or Installments per the Cardholder agreement with the Merchant.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetMITTotalPaymentCount();
int SetMITTotalPaymentCount(const char* lpszMITTotalPaymentCount); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetMITTotalPaymentCount();
INT SetMITTotalPaymentCount(LPCWSTR lpszMITTotalPaymentCount);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmittotalpaymentcount(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmittotalpaymentcount(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMITTotalPaymentCount);
QString GetMITTotalPaymentCount();
int SetMITTotalPaymentCount(QString qsMITTotalPaymentCount);

Default Value

""

Remarks

The number of Recurring payments or Installments per the Cardholder agreement with the Merchant.

The following values are defined:

Value Description
01 to 99Installment Count
UD Not Defined
UC Until Canceled

This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa', 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'. For Discover, the valid values should be from 02 to 99, UD and UC. For Visa, the valid values should be from 01 to 99. Note: For Visa recurring payments, value of '99' means that recurring payments are authorized until canceled or that the Number of Recurring Payments is not defined.

When this field is sent for Visa or Discover (including JCB - US Domestic Only and Diners), the Bill Payment Transaction Indicator must be present with the value of 'Recurring' or 'Installment'. For Discover (including JCB - US Domestic Only and Diners) installment transactions, this field can only be sent when the Installment Type field contains the value of 'Merchant' or 'ThirdParty'. For Discover (including JCB - US Domestic Only and Diners) installment transactions, this field must be sent for ALL Installment transactions for a series of payments, and the original CIT transaction must be initiated with 3DS.

The maximum length of this field is 2 characters.

Data Type

String

MITUniqueID Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property is used to uniquely identify each of the Recurring or Installment Payment.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetMITUniqueID();
int SetMITUniqueID(const char* lpszMITUniqueID); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetMITUniqueID();
INT SetMITUniqueID(LPCWSTR lpszMITUniqueID);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmituniqueid(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmituniqueid(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMITUniqueID);
QString GetMITUniqueID();
int SetMITUniqueID(QString qsMITUniqueID);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This field is used to uniquely identify each of the Recurring or Installment Payment. This ID is used to reference authorization transactions.

This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Discover', 'JCB' or 'Diners'.

The maximum length of this field is 14 characters.

Data Type

String

MITValidationFlag Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Indicates the validation source for the validity of a transaction.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetMITValidationFlag();
int SetMITValidationFlag(int iMITValidationFlag); Unicode (Windows) INT GetMITValidationFlag();
INT SetMITValidationFlag(INT iMITValidationFlag);

Possible Values

VF_UNSPECIFIED(0), 
VF_VALIDATED(1),
VF_NOT_VALIDATED(2)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitvalidationflag(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitvalidationflag(void* lpObj, int iMITValidationFlag);
int GetMITValidationFlag();
int SetMITValidationFlag(int iMITValidationFlag);

Default Value

0

Remarks

Indicates the validation source for the validity of a transaction.

This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Visa', 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'.

The following values are defined:

0 (vfUnspecified - default) Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request.
1 (vfValidated) Validated Card Transaction
2 (vfNotValidated) Not Validated Card Transaction

Data Type

Integer

MITValidationRef Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property contains a cryptogram generated by the validation source for each cardholder account, for an Issuer to validate a transaction.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetMITValidationRef();
int SetMITValidationRef(const char* lpszMITValidationRef); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetMITValidationRef();
INT SetMITValidationRef(LPCWSTR lpszMITValidationRef);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmitvalidationref(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmitvalidationref(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMITValidationRef);
QString GetMITValidationRef();
int SetMITValidationRef(QString qsMITValidationRef);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This field contains a cryptogram generated by the validation source for each cardholder account, for an Issuer to validate a transaction.

This field is only applicable when Card Type is 'Discover', 'JCB', or 'Diners'.

The maximum length of this field is 20 characters.

Data Type

String

TransactionIndicator Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Specifies the type of Bill Payment being made.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetTransactionIndicator();
int SetTransactionIndicator(int iTransactionIndicator); Unicode (Windows) INT GetTransactionIndicator();
INT SetTransactionIndicator(INT iTransactionIndicator);

Possible Values

TI_UNSPECIFIED(0), 
TI_SINGLE_TRANSACTION(1),
TI_RECURRING(2),
TI_INSTALLMENT(3),
TI_DEFERRED_BILLING(4)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_gettransactionindicator(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_settransactionindicator(void* lpObj, int iTransactionIndicator);
int GetTransactionIndicator();
int SetTransactionIndicator(int iTransactionIndicator);

Default Value

0

Remarks

Specifies the type of Bill Payment being made.

This property contains the type of bill payment being made. This is applicable to ECommerce, MOTO, and Retail transactions. Possible values are:

0 (tiUnspecified - default) Unspecified - the field is not sent in the request.
1 (tiSingleTransaction) Single transaction
2 (tiRecurring) Recurring transaction
3 (tiInstallment) Installment transaction
4 (tiDeferredBilling) Deferred Billing transaction

To settle an Installment transaction, you must use the FDMSRcDetailrecord class to add the number of this installment and the total count of all installments to be made. For instance, if the purchase was for "Three easy payments of $19.95", and this is the first payment, then the installment number will be 1, and the installment count 3. An example is included below:

FDMSRcECommerce.Config("BillPaymentType=3") // 3=Installment FDMSRcECommerce.TransactionAmount = "1995" FDMSRcECommerce.AuthOnly() FDMSRcDetailRecord.ParseAggregate(FDMSRcECommerce.GetDetailAggregate()) FDMSRcDetailRecord.InstallmentCount = 3 FDMSRcDetailRecord.InstallmentNumber = 1 FDMSRcSettle.DetailRecordAggregate(5) = FDMSRcDetailRecord.GetDetailAggregate()

Data Type

Integer

CardType Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Type of credit card being used in this transaction.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetCardType();
int SetCardType(int iCardType); Unicode (Windows) INT GetCardType();
INT SetCardType(INT iCardType);

Possible Values

CT_UNKNOWN(0), 
CT_VISA(1),
CT_MASTER_CARD(2),
CT_AMEX(3),
CT_DISCOVER(4),
CT_DINERS(5),
CT_JCB(6),
CT_VISA_ELECTRON(7),
CT_MAESTRO(8),
CT_LASER(10)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardtype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardtype(void* lpObj, int iCardType);
int GetCardType();
int SetCardType(int iCardType);

Default Value

0

Remarks

Type of credit card being used in this transaction. This property contains the customer's credit card type. This is automatically computed after the CardNumber is set, but it can also be changed manually. A list of valid card types is included below.

ctUnknown (0) Invalid or unknown prefix, card type not known.
ctVisa (1) Visa or Delta Card.
ctMasterCard (2) MasterCard.
ctAMEX (3) American Express Card.
ctDiscover (4) Discover Card.
ctDiners (5) Diners Club or Carte Blanche Card.
ctJCB (6) JCB Card.
ctVisaElectron (7) Visa Electron Card (runs as a Visa for most gateways)
ctMaestro (8) Maestro Card
ctLaser (10) Laser Card (Ireland)

This property is not available at design time.

Data Type

Integer

CardCVVData Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Three digit security code on back of card (optional).

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetCardCVVData();
int SetCardCVVData(const char* lpszCardCVVData); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetCardCVVData();
INT SetCardCVVData(LPCWSTR lpszCardCVVData);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardcvvdata(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardcvvdata(void* lpObj, const char* lpszCardCVVData);
QString GetCardCVVData();
int SetCardCVVData(QString qsCardCVVData);

Default Value

""

Remarks

Three digit security code on back of card (optional).

This alphanumeric property contains the three digit Visa "Card Verification Value" (CVV), MasterCard "Card Verification Code" (CVC), or four-digit American Express "Card Identification Number" (CID). This value appears as additional characters embossed on the card signature line following the credit card account number on the back of the credit card. This is an optional property which can be used to determine if the customer is actually in possession of the credit card.

Even if the CardCVVData is incorrect, the transaction may still be authorized. It is up to the merchant to examine the ResponseCVVResult property and decide whether to honor the transaction or not.

Note: When set to a non-empty value, CardCVVPresence will be automatically set to cvpProvided. If set to empty string (""), CardCVVPresence will be automatically set to cvpNotProvided.

This property is not available at design time.

Data Type

String

CardCVVPresence Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Indicates the presence of the card verification value.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetCardCVVPresence();
int SetCardCVVPresence(int iCardCVVPresence); Unicode (Windows) INT GetCardCVVPresence();
INT SetCardCVVPresence(INT iCardCVVPresence);

Possible Values

CVP_NOT_PROVIDED(0), 
CVP_PROVIDED(1),
CVP_ILLEGIBLE(2),
CVP_NOT_ON_CARD(3)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardcvvpresence(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardcvvpresence(void* lpObj, int iCardCVVPresence);
int GetCardCVVPresence();
int SetCardCVVPresence(int iCardCVVPresence);

Default Value

0

Remarks

Indicates the presence of the card verification value.

This property is used to indicate the presence of CardCVVData.

The class will automatically set this value to cvpProvided when a CardCVVData value is specified. You can explicitly specify the CardCVVPresence indicator by setting this property.

Available values are:

  • cvpNotProvided (0)
  • cvpProvided (1)
  • cvpIllegible (2)
  • cvpNotOnCard (3)

This property is not available at design time.

Data Type

Integer

CardEntryDataSource Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property contains a 1-character code identifying the source of the customer data.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetCardEntryDataSource();
int SetCardEntryDataSource(int iCardEntryDataSource); Unicode (Windows) INT GetCardEntryDataSource();
INT SetCardEntryDataSource(INT iCardEntryDataSource);

Possible Values

EDS_TRACK_1(0), 
EDS_TRACK_2(1),
EDS_MANUAL_ENTRY_TRACK_1CAPABLE(2),
EDS_MANUAL_ENTRY_TRACK_2CAPABLE(3),
EDS_MANUAL_ENTRY_NO_CARD_READER(4),
EDS_TRACK_1CONTACTLESS(5),
EDS_TRACK_2CONTACTLESS(6),
EDS_MANUAL_ENTRY_CONTACTLESS_CAPABLE(7),
EDS_IVR(8),
EDS_KIOSK(9)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardentrydatasource(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardentrydatasource(void* lpObj, int iCardEntryDataSource);
int GetCardEntryDataSource();
int SetCardEntryDataSource(int iCardEntryDataSource);

Default Value

0

Remarks

This property contains a 1-character code identifying the source of the customer data. The table below shows all supported values for this property.

edsTrack1 (0) Full Magnetic stripe read and transmit, Track 1.
edsTrack2 (1) Full magnetic stripe read and transmit, Track 2.
edsManualEntryTrack1Capable (2) Manually keyed, Track 1 capable.
edsManualEntryTrack2Capable (3)Manually keyed, Track 2 capable.
edsManualEntryNoCardReader (4)Manually keyed, terminal has no card reading capability (use this for e-commerce and MOTO transactions).
edsTrack1Contactless (5)Full magnetic stripe read (Track 1 only), Chip Card capable terminal (Visa, Mastercard, and JCB Transactions only).
edsTrack2Contactless (6)Full magnetic stripe read (Track 2 only), Chip Card capable terminal (Visa, Mastercard, and JCB Transactions only).
edsManualEntryContactlessCapable (7)Manually keyed, Chip Card read capable terminal (Visa, MasterCard, and JCB transactions only).
edsIVR (8)Interactive Voice Response processing. This is applicable to Mail Order/Telephone Order (MOTO) transactions. (CardNumber, CardExpMonth, and CardExpYear are sent).
edsKiosk (9)Automated kiosk transaction. Track1 or Track2 data must be sent in CardMagneticStripe, the transaction cannot be manually entered.

Below is a list of processors and their support EntryDataSource values:

FDMS - edsTrack1, edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable, edsManualEntryNoCardReader, edsTrack1Contactless, edsTrack2Contactless, edsManualEntryContactlessCapable, edsIVR, edsKiosk

FDMSOmaha - All EntryDataSources applicable

FDMS Rapid Connect - All EntryDataSources applicable

Global - edsTrack1, edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable, edsManualEntryNoCardReader, edsTrack1Contactless, edsTrack2Contactless, edsIVR, edsKiosk

PTech - edsTrack1, edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable, edsManualEntryNoCardReader, edsTrack1Contactless, edsTrack2Contactless, edsManualEntryContactlessCapable

TSYS - edsTrack1, edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable, edsManualEntryNoCardReader, edsTrack2Contactless, edsManualEntryContactlessCapable

TSYSHC - Values are based on Industry type.

TSYSHCBenefit edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable
TSYSHCECommerce edsManualEntryNoCardReader
TSYSHCRetail edsTrack1, edsTrack2, edsManualEntryTrack1Capable, edsManualEntryTrack2Capable, edsTrack1Contactless, edsTrack2Contactless, edsManualEntryContactlessCapable

This property is not available at design time.

Data Type

Integer

CardExpMonth Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Expiration month of the credit card specified in Number .

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetCardExpMonth();
int SetCardExpMonth(int iCardExpMonth); Unicode (Windows) INT GetCardExpMonth();
INT SetCardExpMonth(INT iCardExpMonth);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardexpmonth(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardexpmonth(void* lpObj, int iCardExpMonth);
int GetCardExpMonth();
int SetCardExpMonth(int iCardExpMonth);

Default Value

1

Remarks

Expiration month of the credit card specified in CardNumber.

This property contains the expiration date of the customer's credit card, and must be in the range 1 - 12.

This property is not available at design time.

Data Type

Integer

CardExpYear Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Expiration year of the credit card specified in Number .

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetCardExpYear();
int SetCardExpYear(int iCardExpYear); Unicode (Windows) INT GetCardExpYear();
INT SetCardExpYear(INT iCardExpYear);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardexpyear(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardexpyear(void* lpObj, int iCardExpYear);
int GetCardExpYear();
int SetCardExpYear(int iCardExpYear);

Default Value

2000

Remarks

Expiration year of the credit card specified in CardNumber.

This property contains the expiration date of the customer's credit card. This property must be in the range 0 - 99, or 2000 - 2099. Any date before the year 2000 or after 2099 cannot be specified.

This property is not available at design time.

Data Type

Integer

CardIsEncrypted Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Determines whether data set to the Number or MagneticStripe properties is validated.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetCardIsEncrypted();
int SetCardIsEncrypted(int bCardIsEncrypted); Unicode (Windows) BOOL GetCardIsEncrypted();
INT SetCardIsEncrypted(BOOL bCardIsEncrypted);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardisencrypted(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardisencrypted(void* lpObj, int bCardIsEncrypted);
bool GetCardIsEncrypted();
int SetCardIsEncrypted(bool bCardIsEncrypted);

Default Value

FALSE

Remarks

Determines whether data set to the CardNumber or CardMagneticStripe fields is validated.

By default, when the CardNumber or CardMagneticStripe fields are set, the value will be validated and normalized. For instance, "4444-33332222 1111" will be normalized as "4444333322221111" and CardMagneticStripe data will be parsed for the track specified by CardEntryDataSource. However, any other non-numerical data entered will cause an exception to be thrown. It may be useful in some gateways to send other data in the CardNumber or CardMagneticStripe fields, and this can be accomplished by setting IsEncrypted to true. However, please note that in doing so automatic calculation of the CardType may be affected, and the card number will not be verified.

This property is not available at design time.

Data Type

Boolean

CardMagneticStripe Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Track data read off of the card's magnetic stripe.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetCardMagneticStripe();
int SetCardMagneticStripe(const char* lpszCardMagneticStripe); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetCardMagneticStripe();
INT SetCardMagneticStripe(LPCWSTR lpszCardMagneticStripe);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardmagneticstripe(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardmagneticstripe(void* lpObj, const char* lpszCardMagneticStripe);
QString GetCardMagneticStripe();
int SetCardMagneticStripe(QString qsCardMagneticStripe);

Default Value

""

Remarks

Track data read off of the card's magnetic stripe.

If CardEntryDataSource is not one of the manually entered enumerations, then this property must be set with the track1 or track2 data from the magnetic stripe on the back of the customer's credit card. This includes everything after but not including the start sentinel (% or ;) and up to but not including the end sentinel (?) and LRC check character. You may only set this property with track 1 or track 2 data, and may not pass both. Use the CardEntryDataSource property to indicate which track you are sending.

The following example shows how to set the CardMagneticStripe and CardEntryDataSource properties if the data read off the card is "%B4788250000028291^TSYS^05121015432112345678?;4788250000028291=05121015432112345678?"

class.CardMagneticStripe = "B4788250000028291^TSYS^05121015432112345678" class.CardEntryDataSource = edsTrack1 or class.CardMagneticStripe = "4788250000028291=05121015432112345678" class.CardEntryDataSource = edsTrack2

Industry regulations do not allow merchants or processors to store track data in any form of persistent storage. Failure to abide by this regulation can result in significant fines and other penalties.

This property is not available at design time.

Data Type

String

CardNumber Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Customer's credit card number for the transaction.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetCardNumber();
int SetCardNumber(const char* lpszCardNumber); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetCardNumber();
INT SetCardNumber(LPCWSTR lpszCardNumber);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcardnumber(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcardnumber(void* lpObj, const char* lpszCardNumber);
QString GetCardNumber();
int SetCardNumber(QString qsCardNumber);

Default Value

""

Remarks

Customer's credit card number for the transaction.

If you're sending the transaction with CardMagneticStripe data, this property should be left empty.

This property is not available at design time.

Data Type

String

CashBack Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Optional cash back amount to return to the customer.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetCashBack();
int SetCashBack(const char* lpszCashBack); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetCashBack();
INT SetCashBack(LPCWSTR lpszCashBack);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcashback(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcashback(void* lpObj, const char* lpszCashBack);
QString GetCashBack();
int SetCashBack(QString qsCashBack);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The largest possible CashBack amount is "99999", yielding a maximum US dollar amount of $999.99. This field may not contain a negative number.

For cash back transactions, the TransactionAmount must contain the sum total of the purchase amount PLUS the CashBack amount. If the purchase is for $10 and the customer requests $20 cash back, CashBack should be set to "2000" and TransactionAmount must contain "3000".

Note that only US currency is supported for debit transactions.

Data Type

String

CustomerAddress Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The customer's billing address.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetCustomerAddress();
int SetCustomerAddress(const char* lpszCustomerAddress); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetCustomerAddress();
INT SetCustomerAddress(LPCWSTR lpszCustomerAddress);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcustomeraddress(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcustomeraddress(void* lpObj, const char* lpszCustomerAddress);
QString GetCustomerAddress();
int SetCustomerAddress(QString qsCustomerAddress);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This field is used as part of the Address Verification Service (AVS) and contains the customer's street address as it appears on their monthly statement. Only the street number, street name, and apartment number are required in this field. City and state are not included, and the zip code is set in the CustomerZip property.

The maximum length of this property is 30 characters.

If the customer's address is much greater than the length of this field, it is admissible to include only the street number in this field.

Data Type

String

CustomerZip Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Customer's zip code (or postal code if outside of the USA).

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetCustomerZip();
int SetCustomerZip(const char* lpszCustomerZip); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetCustomerZip();
INT SetCustomerZip(LPCWSTR lpszCustomerZip);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getcustomerzip(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setcustomerzip(void* lpObj, const char* lpszCustomerZip);
QString GetCustomerZip();
int SetCustomerZip(QString qsCustomerZip);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This field is used as part of the Address Verification Service (AVS). If the customer resides within the United States, this field should contain the five or nine digit zip code as it appears on the customer's monthly statement. If the customer's billing address is outside of the United States, this field should contain the customer's postal code.

The maximum length of this property is 9 characters.

Data Type

String

DatawireId Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Identifies the merchant to the Datawire System.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetDatawireId();
int SetDatawireId(const char* lpszDatawireId); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetDatawireId();
INT SetDatawireId(LPCWSTR lpszDatawireId);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getdatawireid(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setdatawireid(void* lpObj, const char* lpszDatawireId);
QString GetDatawireId();
int SetDatawireId(QString qsDatawireId);

Default Value

""

Remarks

The Datawire Id is a unique customer identifier generated by Datawire and returned to the client after successfully registering the merchant (using the FDMSRegister class). This Id (which is sent in all subsequent transactions) allows a transaction, to pass through the Datawire system and be correctly routed to the FDMS Payment processor.

The maximum length for this property is 32 characters.

Data Type

String

EMVData Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The EMV Data returned from a Pin Pad after reading an EMV card.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetEMVData();
int SetEMVData(const char* lpszEMVData); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetEMVData();
INT SetEMVData(LPCWSTR lpszEMVData);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getemvdata(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setemvdata(void* lpObj, const char* lpszEMVData);
QString GetEMVData();
int SetEMVData(QString qsEMVData);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This configuration setting takes the entire TLV (tag-length-value) response received from a Pin Pad after reading an EMV card. The class will send this data in an authorization request.

Retail EMV Example Fdmsrcretail fdmsrcretail = new Fdmsrcretail(); fdmsrcretail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail; fdmsrcretail.TPPID = "AAA000"; fdmsrcretail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001"; fdmsrcretail.MerchantId = "1234"; fdmsrcretail.GroupId = "20001"; fdmsrcretail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566"; fdmsrcretail.VisaIdentifier = "01000000000000"; fdmsrcretail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN"; fdmsrcretail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc"; fdmsrcretail.STAN = "112"; fdmsrcretail.TransactionNumber = "120013"; fdmsrcretail.ReferenceNumber = "123456"; fdmsrcretail.OrderNumber = "12000503"; fdmsrcretail.Card.MagneticStripe = "4761739001010010=15122011143804489"; fdmsrcretail.Card.EntryDataSource = EntryDataSources.edsTrack2; fdmsrcretail.TransactionAmount = "250"; fdmsrcretail.EMVData = "9F4005F000F0A0019F...F7906123456789012"; fdmsrcretail.Sale();

Data Type

String

GroupId Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The Id assigned by FDMS to identify the merchant or group of merchants.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetGroupId();
int SetGroupId(const char* lpszGroupId); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetGroupId();
INT SetGroupId(LPCWSTR lpszGroupId);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getgroupid(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setgroupid(void* lpObj, const char* lpszGroupId);
QString GetGroupId();
int SetGroupId(QString qsGroupId);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property specifies the FDMS assigned group Id. This Id identifies the merchant or group of merchants. This property is required.

Data Type

String

IndustryType Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The merchant's industry type.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetIndustryType();
int SetIndustryType(int iIndustryType); Unicode (Windows) INT GetIndustryType();
INT SetIndustryType(INT iIndustryType);

Possible Values

FRIT_RETAIL(0), 
FRIT_RESTAURANT(1),
FRIT_HOTEL(2)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getindustrytype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setindustrytype(void* lpObj, int iIndustryType);
int GetIndustryType();
int SetIndustryType(int iIndustryType);

Default Value

0

Remarks

The merchant's industry type. Possible values are:

0 (fritRetail - default) Retail
1 (fritRestaurant) Restaurant
2 (fritHotel) Hotel

Data Type

Integer

Level2CustomerReferenceNumber Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The reference number or order number to be reported as part of the Purchase Card data.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetLevel2CustomerReferenceNumber();
int SetLevel2CustomerReferenceNumber(const char* lpszLevel2CustomerReferenceNumber); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetLevel2CustomerReferenceNumber();
INT SetLevel2CustomerReferenceNumber(LPCWSTR lpszLevel2CustomerReferenceNumber);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2customerreferencenumber(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2customerreferencenumber(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2CustomerReferenceNumber);
QString GetLevel2CustomerReferenceNumber();
int SetLevel2CustomerReferenceNumber(QString qsLevel2CustomerReferenceNumber);

Default Value

""

Remarks

The reference number or order number to be reported as part of the Purchase Card data.

If Level2TaxAmount is specified this property is required.

The value may be up to 17 characters in length.

Data Type

String

Level2DestinationCountryCode Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property represents the country code of the location the items in this purchase are being delivered to.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetLevel2DestinationCountryCode();
int SetLevel2DestinationCountryCode(const char* lpszLevel2DestinationCountryCode); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetLevel2DestinationCountryCode();
INT SetLevel2DestinationCountryCode(LPCWSTR lpszLevel2DestinationCountryCode);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2destinationcountrycode(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2destinationcountrycode(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2DestinationCountryCode);
QString GetLevel2DestinationCountryCode();
int SetLevel2DestinationCountryCode(QString qsLevel2DestinationCountryCode);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This field represents the country code of the location the items in this purchase are being delivered to.

This value is the ISO 3166 three digit numeric identifier.

Data Type

String

Level2DestinationPostalCode Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property contains the postal or zip code of the location the item(s) in this purchase are being delivered to.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetLevel2DestinationPostalCode();
int SetLevel2DestinationPostalCode(const char* lpszLevel2DestinationPostalCode); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetLevel2DestinationPostalCode();
INT SetLevel2DestinationPostalCode(LPCWSTR lpszLevel2DestinationPostalCode);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2destinationpostalcode(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2destinationpostalcode(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2DestinationPostalCode);
QString GetLevel2DestinationPostalCode();
int SetLevel2DestinationPostalCode(QString qsLevel2DestinationPostalCode);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property contains the postal or zip code of the location the item(s) in this purchase are being delivered to.

This property is required for American Express purchase card transactions. This is the same as the Level2ShipFromPostalCode when the customer takes possession of the items at the merchant location.

The value may be up to 9 characters.

Data Type

String

Level2DiscountAmount Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property contains the discount amount for the purchase.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetLevel2DiscountAmount();
int SetLevel2DiscountAmount(const char* lpszLevel2DiscountAmount); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetLevel2DiscountAmount();
INT SetLevel2DiscountAmount(LPCWSTR lpszLevel2DiscountAmount);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2discountamount(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2discountamount(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2DiscountAmount);
QString GetLevel2DiscountAmount();
int SetLevel2DiscountAmount(QString qsLevel2DiscountAmount);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property contains the discount amount for the purchase.

This property is required for Visa, MasterCard, and American Express purchase card transactions when a discount has been applied.

This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.

The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.

Data Type

String

Level2DutyAmount Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property contains the duty amount for this purchase.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetLevel2DutyAmount();
int SetLevel2DutyAmount(const char* lpszLevel2DutyAmount); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetLevel2DutyAmount();
INT SetLevel2DutyAmount(LPCWSTR lpszLevel2DutyAmount);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2dutyamount(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2dutyamount(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2DutyAmount);
QString GetLevel2DutyAmount();
int SetLevel2DutyAmount(QString qsLevel2DutyAmount);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property contains the duty amount for this purchase.

This property is required for Visa, MasterCard, and American Express purchase card transactions when a duty amount has been applied.

This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.

The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.

Data Type

String

Level2FreightAmount Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property contains the amount for freight included in this purchase.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetLevel2FreightAmount();
int SetLevel2FreightAmount(const char* lpszLevel2FreightAmount); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetLevel2FreightAmount();
INT SetLevel2FreightAmount(LPCWSTR lpszLevel2FreightAmount);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2freightamount(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2freightamount(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2FreightAmount);
QString GetLevel2FreightAmount();
int SetLevel2FreightAmount(QString qsLevel2FreightAmount);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property contains the amount for freight included in this purchase.

This property is required for Visa, MasterCard, and American Express purchase card transactions when a freight amount has been applied.

This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.

The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.

Data Type

String

Level2MerchantTaxId Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property should contain the Tax Id collected by the merchant for this transaction.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetLevel2MerchantTaxId();
int SetLevel2MerchantTaxId(const char* lpszLevel2MerchantTaxId); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetLevel2MerchantTaxId();
INT SetLevel2MerchantTaxId(LPCWSTR lpszLevel2MerchantTaxId);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2merchanttaxid(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2merchanttaxid(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2MerchantTaxId);
QString GetLevel2MerchantTaxId();
int SetLevel2MerchantTaxId(QString qsLevel2MerchantTaxId);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property should contain the Tax Id collected by the merchant for this transaction.

This property is required for MasterCard purchase card transactions.

The value may be up to 15 characters in length.

Data Type

String

Level2ProductDescription Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property should contain a description of an item purchased with this card.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetLevel2ProductDescription();
int SetLevel2ProductDescription(const char* lpszLevel2ProductDescription); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetLevel2ProductDescription();
INT SetLevel2ProductDescription(LPCWSTR lpszLevel2ProductDescription);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2productdescription(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2productdescription(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2ProductDescription);
QString GetLevel2ProductDescription();
int SetLevel2ProductDescription(QString qsLevel2ProductDescription);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property should contain a description of an item purchased with this card.

This property is required for American Express purchase card transactions and not applicable to other card types.

The value may be up to 40 characters in length.

Data Type

String

Level2PurchaseIdentifier Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property represents the data used by the merchant or customer to identify the purchase.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetLevel2PurchaseIdentifier();
int SetLevel2PurchaseIdentifier(const char* lpszLevel2PurchaseIdentifier); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetLevel2PurchaseIdentifier();
INT SetLevel2PurchaseIdentifier(LPCWSTR lpszLevel2PurchaseIdentifier);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2purchaseidentifier(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2purchaseidentifier(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2PurchaseIdentifier);
QString GetLevel2PurchaseIdentifier();
int SetLevel2PurchaseIdentifier(QString qsLevel2PurchaseIdentifier);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property represents the data used by the merchant or customer to identify the purchase. This can be a SKU, code, or reference number.

This property is required for Visa, MasterCard, and American Express purchase card transactions.

The value may be up to 25 characters in length.

Data Type

String

Level2ShipFromPostalCode Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The postal or zip code the item(s) in this purchase are to be shipped from.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetLevel2ShipFromPostalCode();
int SetLevel2ShipFromPostalCode(const char* lpszLevel2ShipFromPostalCode); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetLevel2ShipFromPostalCode();
INT SetLevel2ShipFromPostalCode(LPCWSTR lpszLevel2ShipFromPostalCode);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2shipfrompostalcode(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2shipfrompostalcode(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2ShipFromPostalCode);
QString GetLevel2ShipFromPostalCode();
int SetLevel2ShipFromPostalCode(QString qsLevel2ShipFromPostalCode);

Default Value

""

Remarks

The postal or zip code the item(s) in this purchase are to be shipped from.

The value may be up to 9 characters.

Data Type

String

Level2TaxAmount Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property contains the portion of the transaction amount that represents the tax.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetLevel2TaxAmount();
int SetLevel2TaxAmount(const char* lpszLevel2TaxAmount); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetLevel2TaxAmount();
INT SetLevel2TaxAmount(LPCWSTR lpszLevel2TaxAmount);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2taxamount(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2taxamount(void* lpObj, const char* lpszLevel2TaxAmount);
QString GetLevel2TaxAmount();
int SetLevel2TaxAmount(QString qsLevel2TaxAmount);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property contains the portion of the transaction amount that represents the tax.

This property is required when Level2TaxIndicator is set to 2 (tiProvided).

For Visa this is the amount of state or provincial tax included in the TransactionAmount. The tax amount must be within 0.1 % and 22% of the pre-tax transaction amount.

For MasterCard the total amount of sales tax on the total purchase must be between 0.1% and 30 % of the total pre-tax transaction amount; zeros indicate that the card acceptor is capable of transmitting the tax amount and the tax amount is zero.

This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.

The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.

Data Type

String

Level2TaxIndicator Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property indicates the taxable status of the transaction.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetLevel2TaxIndicator();
int SetLevel2TaxIndicator(int iLevel2TaxIndicator); Unicode (Windows) INT GetLevel2TaxIndicator();
INT SetLevel2TaxIndicator(INT iLevel2TaxIndicator);

Possible Values

TI_UN_SET(0), 
TI_NOT_PROVIDED(1),
TI_PROVIDED(2),
TI_EXEMPT(3)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getlevel2taxindicator(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setlevel2taxindicator(void* lpObj, int iLevel2TaxIndicator);
int GetLevel2TaxIndicator();
int SetLevel2TaxIndicator(int iLevel2TaxIndicator);

Default Value

0

Remarks

This field indicates the taxable status of the transaction. Possible values are:

0 (tiUnSet - default) UnSet - no value is sent in the request
1 (tiNotProvided) No tax information provided
2 (tiProvided) Tax amount is provided
3 (tiExempt) Purchase item is tax exempt or non-taxable

Data Type

Integer

MerchantId Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

A unique Id used to identify the merchant within the FDMS and Datawire systems.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetMerchantId();
int SetMerchantId(const char* lpszMerchantId); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetMerchantId();
INT SetMerchantId(LPCWSTR lpszMerchantId);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmerchantid(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmerchantid(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMerchantId);
QString GetMerchantId();
int SetMerchantId(QString qsMerchantId);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property holds the Merchant Id assigned by FDMS. The value is an alphanumeric value up to 16 characters in length.

This property is required.

Data Type

String

MerchantServicePhone Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The merchant's phone number, used to assist cardholders.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetMerchantServicePhone();
int SetMerchantServicePhone(const char* lpszMerchantServicePhone); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetMerchantServicePhone();
INT SetMerchantServicePhone(LPCWSTR lpszMerchantServicePhone);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmerchantservicephone(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmerchantservicephone(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMerchantServicePhone);
QString GetMerchantServicePhone();
int SetMerchantServicePhone(QString qsMerchantServicePhone);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property specifies a 10 digit phone number which cardholders can call for assistance.

This value is required for MOTO transactions. It is recommended but not required for ecommerce and hotel transactions.

Data Type

String

MerchantTerminalNumber Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Used to identify a unique terminal within a merchant location.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetMerchantTerminalNumber();
int SetMerchantTerminalNumber(const char* lpszMerchantTerminalNumber); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetMerchantTerminalNumber();
INT SetMerchantTerminalNumber(LPCWSTR lpszMerchantTerminalNumber);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmerchantterminalnumber(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmerchantterminalnumber(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMerchantTerminalNumber);
QString GetMerchantTerminalNumber();
int SetMerchantTerminalNumber(QString qsMerchantTerminalNumber);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property contains a number assigned by FDMS to uniquely identify a terminal within a merchant location. The value is numeric and may be up to 8 digits in length.

This property is required.

Data Type

String

MerchantURL Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The URL of the site performing the ECommerce transaction.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetMerchantURL();
int SetMerchantURL(const char* lpszMerchantURL); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetMerchantURL();
INT SetMerchantURL(LPCWSTR lpszMerchantURL);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getmerchanturl(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setmerchanturl(void* lpObj, const char* lpszMerchantURL);
QString GetMerchantURL();
int SetMerchantURL(QString qsMerchantURL);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property specifies the URL of the merchant's site. This value is required for ECommerce and Hotel AuthOnly, Sale, Capture, and Credit transactions.

For Visa and Discover transactions this value is limited to 13 characters. For all other card types this value is limited to 32 characters.

Data Type

String

OrderNumber Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

A merchant assigned order number to uniquely reference the transaction.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetOrderNumber();
int SetOrderNumber(const char* lpszOrderNumber); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetOrderNumber();
INT SetOrderNumber(LPCWSTR lpszOrderNumber);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getordernumber(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setordernumber(void* lpObj, const char* lpszOrderNumber);
QString GetOrderNumber();
int SetOrderNumber(QString qsOrderNumber);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property holds a merchant assigned order number that uniquely identifies the transaction. This must hold a numeric value up to 8 digits in length. This value cannot be all zeros.

This value is required for ECommerce and MOTO transactions. This value is optional for Retail transactions.

Data Type

String

ProxyAuthScheme Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property is used to tell the class which type of authorization to perform when connecting to the proxy.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetProxyAuthScheme();
int SetProxyAuthScheme(int iProxyAuthScheme); Unicode (Windows) INT GetProxyAuthScheme();
INT SetProxyAuthScheme(INT iProxyAuthScheme);

Possible Values

AUTH_BASIC(0), 
AUTH_DIGEST(1),
AUTH_PROPRIETARY(2),
AUTH_NONE(3),
AUTH_NTLM(4),
AUTH_NEGOTIATE(5)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getproxyauthscheme(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setproxyauthscheme(void* lpObj, int iProxyAuthScheme);
int GetProxyAuthScheme();
int SetProxyAuthScheme(int iProxyAuthScheme);

Default Value

0

Remarks

This property is used to tell the class which type of authorization to perform when connecting to the proxy. This is used only when the ProxyUser and ProxyPassword properties are set.

ProxyAuthScheme should be set to authNone (3) when no authentication is expected.

By default, ProxyAuthScheme is authBasic (0), and if the ProxyUser and ProxyPassword properties are set, the component will attempt basic authentication.

If ProxyAuthScheme is set to authDigest (1), digest authentication will be attempted instead.

If ProxyAuthScheme is set to authProprietary (2), then the authorization token will not be generated by the class. Look at the configuration file for the class being used to find more information about manually setting this token.

If ProxyAuthScheme is set to authNtlm (4), NTLM authentication will be used.

For security reasons, setting this property will clear the values of ProxyUser and ProxyPassword.

Data Type

Integer

ProxyAutoDetect Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property tells the class whether or not to automatically detect and use proxy system settings, if available.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetProxyAutoDetect();
int SetProxyAutoDetect(int bProxyAutoDetect); Unicode (Windows) BOOL GetProxyAutoDetect();
INT SetProxyAutoDetect(BOOL bProxyAutoDetect);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getproxyautodetect(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setproxyautodetect(void* lpObj, int bProxyAutoDetect);
bool GetProxyAutoDetect();
int SetProxyAutoDetect(bool bProxyAutoDetect);

Default Value

FALSE

Remarks

This property tells the class whether or not to automatically detect and use proxy system settings, if available. The default value is false.

Data Type

Boolean

ProxyPassword Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property contains a password if authentication is to be used for the proxy.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetProxyPassword();
int SetProxyPassword(const char* lpszProxyPassword); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetProxyPassword();
INT SetProxyPassword(LPCWSTR lpszProxyPassword);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getproxypassword(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setproxypassword(void* lpObj, const char* lpszProxyPassword);
QString GetProxyPassword();
int SetProxyPassword(QString qsProxyPassword);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property contains a password if authentication is to be used for the proxy.

If ProxyAuthScheme is set to Basic Authentication, the ProxyUser and ProxyPassword are Base64 encoded and the proxy authentication token will be generated in the form Basic [encoded-user-password].

If ProxyAuthScheme is set to Digest Authentication, the ProxyUser and ProxyPassword properties are used to respond to the Digest Authentication challenge from the server.

If ProxyAuthScheme is set to NTLM Authentication, the ProxyUser and ProxyPassword properties are used to authenticate through NTLM negotiation.

Data Type

String

ProxyPort Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property contains the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) port for the proxy Server (default 80).

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetProxyPort();
int SetProxyPort(int iProxyPort); Unicode (Windows) INT GetProxyPort();
INT SetProxyPort(INT iProxyPort);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getproxyport(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setproxyport(void* lpObj, int iProxyPort);
int GetProxyPort();
int SetProxyPort(int iProxyPort);

Default Value

80

Remarks

This property contains the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) port for the proxy ProxyServer (default 80). See the description of the ProxyServer property for details.

Data Type

Integer

ProxyServer Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

If a proxy Server is given, then the HTTP request is sent to the proxy instead of the server otherwise specified.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetProxyServer();
int SetProxyServer(const char* lpszProxyServer); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetProxyServer();
INT SetProxyServer(LPCWSTR lpszProxyServer);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getproxyserver(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setproxyserver(void* lpObj, const char* lpszProxyServer);
QString GetProxyServer();
int SetProxyServer(QString qsProxyServer);

Default Value

""

Remarks

If a proxy ProxyServer is given, then the HTTP request is sent to the proxy instead of the server otherwise specified.

If the ProxyServer property is set to a domain name, a DNS request is initiated. Upon successful termination of the request, the ProxyServer property is set to the corresponding address. If the search is not successful, an error is returned.

Data Type

String

ProxySSL Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property determines when to use a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) for the connection to the proxy.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetProxySSL();
int SetProxySSL(int iProxySSL); Unicode (Windows) INT GetProxySSL();
INT SetProxySSL(INT iProxySSL);

Possible Values

PS_AUTOMATIC(0), 
PS_ALWAYS(1),
PS_NEVER(2),
PS_TUNNEL(3)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getproxyssl(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setproxyssl(void* lpObj, int iProxySSL);
int GetProxySSL();
int SetProxySSL(int iProxySSL);

Default Value

0

Remarks

This property determines when to use a Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) for the connection to the proxy. The applicable values are as follows:

psAutomatic (0)Default setting. If the URL is an https URL, the class will use the psTunnel option. If the URL is an http URL, the class will use the psNever option.
psAlways (1)The connection is always SSL enabled.
psNever (2)The connection is not SSL enabled.
psTunnel (3)The connection is made through a tunneling (HTTP) proxy.

Data Type

Integer

ProxyUser Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property contains a username if authentication is to be used for the proxy.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetProxyUser();
int SetProxyUser(const char* lpszProxyUser); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetProxyUser();
INT SetProxyUser(LPCWSTR lpszProxyUser);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getproxyuser(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setproxyuser(void* lpObj, const char* lpszProxyUser);
QString GetProxyUser();
int SetProxyUser(QString qsProxyUser);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property contains a username if authentication is to be used for the proxy.

If ProxyAuthScheme is set to Basic Authentication, the ProxyUser and ProxyPassword properties are Base64 encoded and the proxy authentication token will be generated in the form Basic [encoded-user-password].

If ProxyAuthScheme is set to Digest Authentication, the ProxyUser and ProxyPassword properties are used to respond to the Digest Authentication challenge from the server.

If ProxyAuthScheme is set to NTLM Authentication, the ProxyUser and ProxyPassword properties are used to authenticate through NTLM negotiation.

Data Type

String

ReferenceNumber Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

A value assigned by the merchant to uniquely reference a transaction and any subsequent related transactions.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetReferenceNumber();
int SetReferenceNumber(const char* lpszReferenceNumber); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetReferenceNumber();
INT SetReferenceNumber(LPCWSTR lpszReferenceNumber);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getreferencenumber(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setreferencenumber(void* lpObj, const char* lpszReferenceNumber);
QString GetReferenceNumber();
int SetReferenceNumber(QString qsReferenceNumber);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This value is a merchant assigned 12 digit value. The value must be unique within a day for a given merchant id and terminal id. When performing a Capture or Reverse transaction this must be the same as the original transaction.

Data Type

String

ResponseApprovalCode Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The Approval Code returned from the server after a successful authorization.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseApprovalCode();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseApprovalCode();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponseapprovalcode(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseApprovalCode();

Default Value

""

Remarks

The Approval Code returned from the server after a successful authorization.

This value holds the approval code returned by the authorizer. This value will contain up to 8 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and spaces will be returned.

This property is read-only and not available at design time.

Data Type

String

ResponseAuthorizedAmount Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The amount actually charged to the card.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseAuthorizedAmount();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseAuthorizedAmount();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponseauthorizedamount(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseAuthorizedAmount();

Default Value

""

Remarks

The amount actually charged to the card.

This value holds the amount charged to the card. In the case of a partial authorization this will be different than the amount specified in TransactionAmount.

You must collect the remainder via another form of payment, or Reverse the authorization if the customer does not have an additional form of payment.

This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.

The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.

This property is read-only.

Data Type

String

ResponseAuthorizingNetworkId Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property indicates the network Id as returned by the host, if available.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseAuthorizingNetworkId();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseAuthorizingNetworkId();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponseauthorizingnetworkid(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseAuthorizingNetworkId();

Default Value

""

Remarks

This field indicates the network Id as returned by the host, if available.

This value is up to 3 alphanumeric characters.

This property is read-only.

Data Type

String

ResponseAuthorizingNetworkName Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property indicates the authorizing network name as returned by the host, when available.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseAuthorizingNetworkName();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseAuthorizingNetworkName();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponseauthorizingnetworkname(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseAuthorizingNetworkName();

Default Value

""

Remarks

This field indicates the authorizing network name as returned by the host, when available.

This property is read-only.

Data Type

String

ResponseAVSResult Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Contains the Address Verification System result code.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseAVSResult();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseAVSResult();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponseavsresult(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseAVSResult();

Default Value

""

Remarks

Contains the Address Verification System result code.

This one character field contains the Address Verification System (AVS) result code. This property is populated if a value is present in the response. An AVS result code can provide additional information concerning the authentication of a particular transaction for which cardholder address verification was requested. Possible AVS codes are listed in the table below.

Visa Card AVS Codes

CodeDescription
A Street address matches, postal code does not match
B Street addresses match; postal code not verified due to incompatible formats
C Street address and postal code not verified
D Street address and postal code match (International only)
F Street address and postal code match (UK)
G Address information not verified for international transaction. Issuer is not an AVS Participant, or, AVS data was present in the request but the issuer did not return an AVS result, or no address on file (International only)
I Address verification service not performed (International only)
M Street address and postal codes match (International only)
N No match; neither the street addresses nor the postal codes match
P Postal code matches; street address not verified
R Retry, system unavailable to process
S Service not supported
U Address information is unavailable
Y Both postal code and address match
Z Postal code matches, Street address does not match or Street address not included in request

MasterCard AVS Codes

A Street address matches, postal code does not match
E Error: Transaction ineligible for address verification or edit error found in the message that prevents AVS from being performed
N No match; neither the street addresses nor the postal codes match
R Retry, system unavailable to process
S Service not supported
U Address information is unavailable
W U.S. - Street Address does not match, nine digit postal code matches; For address outside the U.S., postal code matches, address does not
X Exact: U.S. - Address and 9-digit postal code match; For address outside the U.S., postal code matches, address does not
Y Yes: Address and 5-digit postal code match for US address
Z Five digit postal code matches, address does not match

Amex AVS Codes

A Street address matches, postal code does not match
N No match; neither the street addresses nor the postal code matches
R Retry, system unavailable to process
S Service not supported
U Address information is unavailable
Y Both postal code and address match
Z Nine or five digit postal code matches, address does not match
L Card member Name and Billing Postal Code match
M Card member Name, Billing Address and Postal Code match
O Card member Name and Billing Address match
K Card member Name matches
D Card member Name incorrect, Billing Postal Code matches
E Card member Name incorrect, Billing Address and Postal Code match
F Card member Name incorrect, Billing Address matches
W No, Card member Name, Billing Address and Postal Code are all incorrect

Discover or JCB

A Both address and five digit postal code match
G Address information not verified for international transaction
N No match; neither the street addresses nor the postal code matches
R Retry, system unable to process
S Service not supported
T No data received from Issuer
W Nine digit postal code matches, address does not match
X All digits match (nine digit zip code)
Y Street address matches, postal code does not match
Z Five digit postal code matches, address does not match

This property is read-only.

Data Type

String

ResponseBalance Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Contains the remaining available balance left on the card.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseBalance();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseBalance();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsebalance(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseBalance();

Default Value

""

Remarks

Contains the remaining available balance left on the card.

This balance amount will only be returned for prepaid cards.

This property is read-only and not available at design time.

Data Type

String

ResponseCardLevelResult Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property is only applicable to Visa card.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseCardLevelResult();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseCardLevelResult();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsecardlevelresult(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseCardLevelResult();

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property is only applicable to Visa card. This property holds a two character value returned by Visa to designate the type of card product used to process the transaction.

This property is read-only and not available at design time.

Data Type

String

ResponseCode Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Contains the 3 digit response code indicating success or reason of failure.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseCode();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseCode();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsecode(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseCode();

Default Value

""

Remarks

Contains the 3 digit response code indicating success or reason of failure.

This property contains a 3 digit code indicating success or the reason of failure. A value of 000 indicates approval. For all other values please see the Response Codes section.

This property is read-only.

Data Type

String

ResponseCommercialCard Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Indicates whether the credit card charged is a corporate commercial card.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetResponseCommercialCard();

Unicode (Windows)
INT GetResponseCommercialCard();

Possible Values

RCCT_NOT_COMMERCIAL(0), 
RCCT_PURCHASE_CARD(1),
RCCT_CORPORATE_CARD(2),
RCCT_BUSINESS_CARD(3),
RCCT_UNKNOWN(4)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsecommercialcard(void* lpObj);
int GetResponseCommercialCard();

Default Value

0

Remarks

Indicates whether the credit card charged is a corporate commercial card.

This is only applicable to Visa cards. Visa Business, corporate, and purchasing cards are subsets of commercial cards. Therefore, the user should send Level 2 (and possibly Level 3) data when calling Capture when this property indicates a commercial card was used. The following table indicates the type of commercial card:

fccNotCommercial (0)Card presented for authorization is not a commercial card
fccPurchaseCard (1)Card presented for authorization is a Visa Purchasing Card.
fccCorporateCard (2)Card presented for authorization is a Visa Corporate Card.
fccBusinessCard (3)Card presented for authorization is a Visa Business Card.
fccUnknown (4)Unable to obtain information from processor.

Note: Tax amounts should be included with the Level2 or Level3 data when calling Capture in order to receive the best interchange rate.

This property is read-only.

Data Type

Integer

ResponseCVVResult Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Contains the returned CVV result code (if CVV data was sent in the request).

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseCVVResult();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseCVVResult();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsecvvresult(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseCVVResult();

Default Value

""

Remarks

Contains the returned CVV result code (if CVV data was sent in the request).

If a CVV value was sent in the authorization, this property will contain the host returned Card Verification Value result code. This property is populated if a value is present in the response. The following is a list of current result codes:

Match Values match
NoMtch Values do not match
NotPrc Not processed
NotPrv Value not provided
NotPrt Issuer not participating
Unknwn Unknown

This property is read-only.

Data Type

String

ResponseDatawireReturnCode Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Contains an error code providing more details about the DatawireStatus received.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseDatawireReturnCode();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseDatawireReturnCode();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsedatawirereturncode(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseDatawireReturnCode();

Default Value

""

Remarks

Contains an error code providing more details about the ResponseDatawireStatus received.

When a transaction is successfully passed from the application, through the Datawire system to the FDMS payment processor and back, the ResponseDatawireStatus will be "OK" and the ResponseDatawireReturnCode will be "000". These two properties have NO BEARING on the actual results of any transaction. Even though the transaction has successfully passed through the Datawire system, it can still fail to be processed successfully by FDMS. This property only indicates that the request reached FDMS, and that FDMS responded with some data.

The ResponseApprovalCode contains the actual transaction result that was returned by FDMS.

The following is a list of possible Datawire return codes:

000 Transaction successfully passed through the Datawire system to the FDMS Payment Processor and back.
200 Host Busy - The processor's Host is busy and is currently unable to service this request.
201 Host Unavailable - The processor's Host is currently unavailable. For example, the server is sending NAK.
202 Host Connect Error - Could not connect to the processor's Host.
203 Host Drop - The processor's Host disconnected during the transaction before sending a response.
204 Host Comm Error - An error was encountered while communicating with the processor's Host.
205 No Response - No response from the processor's Host
206 Host Send Error - An error has encountered when sending the request to the processor, and the Host daemon cannot continue sending packets to the processor because the connection is broken.
405 Vxn Timeout - The request could not be processed.
505 Network Error - The request could not be processed.

This property is read-only.

Data Type

String

ResponseDatawireStatus Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Status of the communication with Datawire.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseDatawireStatus();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseDatawireStatus();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsedatawirestatus(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseDatawireStatus();

Default Value

""

Remarks

Status of the communication with Datawire.

When a transaction is successfully passed from the application, through the Datawire system to the FDMS payment processor and back, the ResponseDatawireStatus will be "OK" and the ResponseDatawireReturnCode will be "000". These two properties have NO BEARING on the actual results of any transaction. Even though the transaction has successfully passed through the Datawire system, it can still fail to be processed successfully by FDMS. This property only indicates that the request reached FDMS, and that FDMS responded with some data.

The ResponseApprovalCode contains the actual FDMS Transaction Result that was returned.

The following is a list of possible Datawire response status codes:

OKTransaction has successfully passed through the Datawire system to the FDMS Payment processor and back.
AuthenticationErrorDatawireId in the request was not successfully authenticated.
UnknownServiceIDServiceId part of the URL (in the Service Discovery or Ping request) is unknown.
WrongSessionContextThe SessionContext element of the Session Transaction request does not match the SessionContext returned by the InitiateSession response (applicable to the FDMSSettle class).
AccessDeniedGenerally, occurs when you try to register a merchant after a merchant has already been activated to use the Datawire VXN.
FailedYour Merchant Registration has failed. Contact tech.support@datawire.net for more information.
RetryRegistration is not yet complete. You must send the Registration request again.
TimeoutNo response from the Service Provider was received during the expected period of time.
XMLErrorRequest contains some XML error, such as malformed XML, violation of this DTD, etc.
OtherErrorUnspecified error occurred.
008Network Error

This property is read-only.

Data Type

String

ResponseEMVData Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Contains the EMV data returns in the response (if any).

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseEMVData();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseEMVData();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponseemvdata(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseEMVData();

Default Value

""

Remarks

Contains the EMV data returns in the response (if any).

This property is only applicable to Retail and Debit transactions.

This property is read-only and not available at design time.

Data Type

String

ResponsePOSData Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property holds transaction specific information returned by the issuer (if any).

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponsePOSData();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponsePOSData();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponseposdata(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponsePOSData();

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property holds transaction specific information returned by the issuer (if any). This is only applicable to MasterCard, Discover, and AmEx card transactions.

This property is read-only and not available at design time.

Data Type

String

ResponseReturnedACI Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Returned Authorization Characteristics Indicator contains CPS qualification status.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseReturnedACI();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseReturnedACI();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsereturnedaci(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseReturnedACI();

Default Value

""

Remarks

Returned Authorization Characteristics Indicator contains CPS qualification status.

This one character field contains the returned Authorization Characteristics Indicator (ACI) for Visa transactions. This value provides information concerning the transaction's Customer Payment Service (CPS) qualification status. It is not recommended that the Point of Sale (POS) system attempt to interpret the meaning of this value.

Possible returned ACI values are:

ValueDescription
A Card Present
B Tokenized Ecommerce via mobile device (Payment Token)
C Card present with merchant name and location data (cardholder activated)
E Card present with merchant name and location data
F Card not present, Account Funding
I Incremental Authorization
J Card not present Recurring bill payment transaction
K Key Entered Transaction (error while reading magnetic stripe data)
N Not a custom payment service transaction
P Card-not-present (preferred customer participation)
R Card-not-present, AVS not required
S Card not present, e-commerce 3-D secure attempt
T Transaction cannot participate in CPS programs
U Card not present, 3-D secure
V Card-not-present, AVS requested
W Card not present, e-commerce non-3-D secure

This property is read-only.

Data Type

String

ResponseRoutingIndicator Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Indicates whether the transaction was processed as Credit or Debit.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseRoutingIndicator();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseRoutingIndicator();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponseroutingindicator(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseRoutingIndicator();

Default Value

""

Remarks

Indicates whether the transaction was processed as Credit or Debit. Possible values are:

ValueMeaning
CCredit
DDebit

This property is read-only.

Data Type

String

ResponseSettlementDate Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The date the transaction will be settled in the format MMDD.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseSettlementDate();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseSettlementDate();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsesettlementdate(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseSettlementDate();

Default Value

""

Remarks

The date the transaction will be settled in the format MMDD.

This property is read-only.

Data Type

String

ResponseText Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This property may hold additional text which describes the reason for a decline, the property in error, etc.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseText();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseText();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsetext(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseText();

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property may hold additional text which describes the reason for a decline, the field in error, etc. Applications should not be coded to the text in this property as it is subject to change.

This property is read-only.

Data Type

String

ResponseTransactionDate Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The transaction date returned from the server in yyyyMMddHHmmss format.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseTransactionDate();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseTransactionDate();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsetransactiondate(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseTransactionDate();

Default Value

""

Remarks

The transaction date returned from the server in yyyyMMddHHmmss format.

This 15 digit field contains the transaction date and time returned by the Rapid Connect system. This is not a local datetime, it is the time according the Rapid Connect system.

This property is read-only.

Data Type

String

ResponseTransactionId Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Card issuer's Transaction Reference Number.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetResponseTransactionId();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetResponseTransactionId();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getresponsetransactionid(void* lpObj);
QString GetResponseTransactionId();

Default Value

""

Remarks

Card issuer's Transaction Reference Number.

This property contains a Visa Transaction Id, MasterCard BankNet data, American Express Transaction Id, or Discover Network Result Indicator (NRID). If returned in the response, this property should be printed on the receipt.

This property is read-only and not available at design time.

Data Type

String

ReversalTransactionType Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The type of transaction to reverse.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetReversalTransactionType();
int SetReversalTransactionType(int iReversalTransactionType); Unicode (Windows) INT GetReversalTransactionType();
INT SetReversalTransactionType(INT iReversalTransactionType);

Possible Values

FRTT_AUTH_ONLY(0), 
FRTT_CAPTURE(1),
FRTT_CREDIT(2),
FRTT_SALE(3)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getreversaltransactiontype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setreversaltransactiontype(void* lpObj, int iReversalTransactionType);
int GetReversalTransactionType();
int SetReversalTransactionType(int iReversalTransactionType);

Default Value

0

Remarks

This property specifies the type of transaction to reverse. Possible values are:

0 (frttAuthOnly - default AuthOnly.
1 (frttCapture) Capture. Only applicable when ReversalType is set to frtTimeoutReversal.
2 (frttCredit) Credit. Only applicable when ReversalType is set to frtTimeoutReversal.
3 (frttSale) Sale.

Data Type

Integer

ReversalType Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The type of reversal.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetReversalType();
int SetReversalType(int iReversalType); Unicode (Windows) INT GetReversalType();
INT SetReversalType(INT iReversalType);

Possible Values

FRT_FULL_REVERSAL(0), 
FRT_TIMEOUT_REVERSAL(1),
FRT_VOID_FOR_SUSPECTED_FRAUD(2),
FRT_PARTIAL_REVERSAL(3)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getreversaltype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setreversaltype(void* lpObj, int iReversalType);
int GetReversalType();
int SetReversalType(int iReversalType);

Default Value

0

Remarks

This property specifies the type of reversal. Possible values are:

0 (frtFullReversal - default) Void / Full Reversal
1 (frtTimeoutReversal) Timeout Reversal
2 (frtVoidForSuspectedFraud) Full Reversal with suspected fraud as the reason. This is only applicable to MasterCard.
3 (frtPartialReversal) Partial Reversal

Timeout Reversals are applicable to the following transaction types:

Full Reversals are applicable to the following transaction types:

Data Type

Integer

SettlementMode Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Indicates whether the class uses Host Capture (0) or Terminal Capture (1) system.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetSettlementMode();
int SetSettlementMode(int iSettlementMode); Unicode (Windows) INT GetSettlementMode();
INT SetSettlementMode(INT iSettlementMode);

Possible Values

SMI_HOST_CAPTURE(0), 
SMI_TERMINAL_CAPTURE(1)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsettlementmode(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsettlementmode(void* lpObj, int iSettlementMode);
int GetSettlementMode();
int SetSettlementMode(int iSettlementMode);

Default Value

0

Remarks

Possible values are:

0 (smiHostCapture - default) Host Capture
1 (smiTerminalCapture) Terminal Capture

Host-Capture means that you authorize your transactions using the AuthOnly or Sale methods, and you process refunds and capture outstanding authorizations with the Credit and Capture methods. FDMS Rapid Connect handles all batch management.

Terminal-Capture means that you handle all of the batch management yourself. This is necessary for the Hotel/Lodging IndustryType, because the final settlement amount may be more than (or less than) the amount that was originally authorized. For instance, a customer may stay longer or shorter than originally planned, or incur additional charges (mini bar, telephone call, room service, etc), and the settlement amount must be adjusted accordingly.

All industry types may be processed in Terminal Capture mode. However, Hotel/Lodging transactions MUST be authorized and settled in Terminal Capture mode. Attempting to authorize a Hotel/Lodging transaction with the Host Capture mode will cause the class fails with an error.

Data Type

Integer

SSLAcceptServerCertEncoded Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This is the certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded).

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded(char* &lpSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded, int &lenSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded);
int SetSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded(const char* lpSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded, int lenSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded); Unicode (Windows) INT GetSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded(LPSTR &lpSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded, INT &lenSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded);
INT SetSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded(LPCSTR lpSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded, INT lenSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslacceptservercertencoded(void* lpObj, char** lpSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded, int* lenSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslacceptservercertencoded(void* lpObj, const char* lpSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded, int lenSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded);
QByteArray GetSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded();
int SetSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded(QByteArray qbaSSLAcceptServerCertEncoded);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This is the certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded). This property is used to assign a specific certificate. The SSLAcceptServerCertStore and SSLAcceptServerCertSubject properties also may be used to specify a certificate.

When SSLAcceptServerCertEncoded is set, a search is initiated in the current SSLAcceptServerCertStore for the private key of the certificate. If the key is found, SSLAcceptServerCertSubject is updated to reflect the full subject of the selected certificate; otherwise, SSLAcceptServerCertSubject is set to an empty string.

This property is not available at design time.

Data Type

Binary String

SSLCertEncoded Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This is the certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded).

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetSSLCertEncoded(char* &lpSSLCertEncoded, int &lenSSLCertEncoded);
int SetSSLCertEncoded(const char* lpSSLCertEncoded, int lenSSLCertEncoded); Unicode (Windows) INT GetSSLCertEncoded(LPSTR &lpSSLCertEncoded, INT &lenSSLCertEncoded);
INT SetSSLCertEncoded(LPCSTR lpSSLCertEncoded, INT lenSSLCertEncoded);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertencoded(void* lpObj, char** lpSSLCertEncoded, int* lenSSLCertEncoded);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslcertencoded(void* lpObj, const char* lpSSLCertEncoded, int lenSSLCertEncoded);
QByteArray GetSSLCertEncoded();
int SetSSLCertEncoded(QByteArray qbaSSLCertEncoded);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This is the certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded). This property is used to assign a specific certificate. The SSLCertStore and SSLCertSubject properties also may be used to specify a certificate.

When SSLCertEncoded is set, a search is initiated in the current SSLCertStore for the private key of the certificate. If the key is found, SSLCertSubject is updated to reflect the full subject of the selected certificate; otherwise, SSLCertSubject is set to an empty string.

This property is not available at design time.

Data Type

Binary String

SSLCertStore Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This is the name of the certificate store for the client certificate.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetSSLCertStore(char* &lpSSLCertStore, int &lenSSLCertStore);
int SetSSLCertStore(const char* lpSSLCertStore, int lenSSLCertStore); Unicode (Windows) INT GetSSLCertStore(LPSTR &lpSSLCertStore, INT &lenSSLCertStore);
INT SetSSLCertStore(LPCSTR lpSSLCertStore, INT lenSSLCertStore);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertstore(void* lpObj, char** lpSSLCertStore, int* lenSSLCertStore);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslcertstore(void* lpObj, const char* lpSSLCertStore, int lenSSLCertStore);
QByteArray GetSSLCertStore();
int SetSSLCertStore(QByteArray qbaSSLCertStore);

Default Value

"MY"

Remarks

This is the name of the certificate store for the client certificate.

The SSLCertStoreType property denotes the type of the certificate store specified by SSLCertStore. If the store is password protected, specify the password in SSLCertStorePassword.

SSLCertStore is used in conjunction with the SSLCertSubject property to specify client certificates. If SSLCertStore has a value, and SSLCertSubject or SSLCertEncoded is set, a search for a certificate is initiated. Please see the SSLCertSubject property for details.

Designations of certificate stores are platform dependent.

The following designations are the most common User and Machine certificate stores in Windows:

MYA certificate store holding personal certificates with their associated private keys.
CACertifying authority certificates.
ROOTRoot certificates.

When the certificate store type is PFXFile, this property must be set to the name of the file. When the type is PFXBlob, the property must be set to the binary contents of a PFX file (i.e., PKCS#12 certificate store).

Data Type

Binary String

SSLCertStorePassword Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

If the type of certificate store requires a password, this property is used to specify the password needed to open the certificate store.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetSSLCertStorePassword();
int SetSSLCertStorePassword(const char* lpszSSLCertStorePassword); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetSSLCertStorePassword();
INT SetSSLCertStorePassword(LPCWSTR lpszSSLCertStorePassword);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertstorepassword(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslcertstorepassword(void* lpObj, const char* lpszSSLCertStorePassword);
QString GetSSLCertStorePassword();
int SetSSLCertStorePassword(QString qsSSLCertStorePassword);

Default Value

""

Remarks

If the type of certificate store requires a password, this property is used to specify the password needed to open the certificate store.

Data Type

String

SSLCertStoreType Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This is the type of certificate store for this certificate.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetSSLCertStoreType();
int SetSSLCertStoreType(int iSSLCertStoreType); Unicode (Windows) INT GetSSLCertStoreType();
INT SetSSLCertStoreType(INT iSSLCertStoreType);

Possible Values

CST_USER(0), 
CST_MACHINE(1),
CST_PFXFILE(2),
CST_PFXBLOB(3),
CST_JKSFILE(4),
CST_JKSBLOB(5),
CST_PEMKEY_FILE(6),
CST_PEMKEY_BLOB(7),
CST_PUBLIC_KEY_FILE(8),
CST_PUBLIC_KEY_BLOB(9),
CST_SSHPUBLIC_KEY_BLOB(10),
CST_P7BFILE(11),
CST_P7BBLOB(12),
CST_SSHPUBLIC_KEY_FILE(13),
CST_PPKFILE(14),
CST_PPKBLOB(15),
CST_XMLFILE(16),
CST_XMLBLOB(17),
CST_JWKFILE(18),
CST_JWKBLOB(19),
CST_SECURITY_KEY(20),
CST_BCFKSFILE(21),
CST_BCFKSBLOB(22),
CST_PKCS11(23),
CST_AUTO(99)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertstoretype(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslcertstoretype(void* lpObj, int iSSLCertStoreType);
int GetSSLCertStoreType();
int SetSSLCertStoreType(int iSSLCertStoreType);

Default Value

0

Remarks

This is the type of certificate store for this certificate.

The class supports both public and private keys in a variety of formats. When the cstAuto value is used, the class will automatically determine the type. This property can take one of the following values:

0 (cstUser - default)For Windows, this specifies that the certificate store is a certificate store owned by the current user.

Note: This store type is not available in Java.

1 (cstMachine)For Windows, this specifies that the certificate store is a machine store.

Note: This store type is not available in Java.

2 (cstPFXFile)The certificate store is the name of a PFX (PKCS#12) file containing certificates.
3 (cstPFXBlob)The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) representing a certificate store in PFX (PKCS#12) format.
4 (cstJKSFile)The certificate store is the name of a Java Key Store (JKS) file containing certificates.

Note: This store type is only available in Java.

5 (cstJKSBlob)The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) representing a certificate store in Java Key Store (JKS) format.

Note: this store type is only available in Java.

6 (cstPEMKeyFile)The certificate store is the name of a PEM-encoded file that contains a private key and an optional certificate.
7 (cstPEMKeyBlob)The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) that contains a private key and an optional certificate.
8 (cstPublicKeyFile)The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a PEM- or DER-encoded public key certificate.
9 (cstPublicKeyBlob)The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) that contains a PEM- or DER-encoded public key certificate.
10 (cstSSHPublicKeyBlob)The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) that contains an SSH-style public key.
11 (cstP7BFile)The certificate store is the name of a PKCS#7 file containing certificates.
12 (cstP7BBlob)The certificate store is a string (binary) representing a certificate store in PKCS#7 format.
13 (cstSSHPublicKeyFile)The certificate store is the name of a file that contains an SSH-style public key.
14 (cstPPKFile)The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a PPK (PuTTY Private Key).
15 (cstPPKBlob)The certificate store is a string (binary) that contains a PPK (PuTTY Private Key).
16 (cstXMLFile)The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a certificate in XML format.
17 (cstXMLBlob)The certificate store is a string that contains a certificate in XML format.
18 (cstJWKFile)The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a JWK (JSON Web Key).
19 (cstJWKBlob)The certificate store is a string that contains a JWK (JSON Web Key).
21 (cstBCFKSFile)The certificate store is the name of a file that contains a BCFKS (Bouncy Castle FIPS Key Store).

Note: This store type is only available in Java and .NET.

22 (cstBCFKSBlob)The certificate store is a string (binary or Base64-encoded) representing a certificate store in BCFKS (Bouncy Castle FIPS Key Store) format.

Note: This store type is only available in Java and .NET.

23 (cstPKCS11)The certificate is present on a physical security key accessible via a PKCS#11 interface.

To use a security key, the necessary data must first be collected using the CertMgr class. The ListStoreCertificates method may be called after setting CertStoreType to cstPKCS11, CertStorePassword to the PIN, and CertStore to the full path of the PKCS#11 DLL. The certificate information returned in the CertList event's CertEncoded parameter may be saved for later use.

When using a certificate, pass the previously saved security key information as the SSLCertStore and set SSLCertStorePassword to the PIN.

Code Example. SSH Authentication with Security Key: certmgr.CertStoreType = CertStoreTypes.cstPKCS11; certmgr.OnCertList += (s, e) => { secKeyBlob = e.CertEncoded; }; certmgr.CertStore = @"C:\Program Files\OpenSC Project\OpenSC\pkcs11\opensc-pkcs11.dll"; certmgr.CertStorePassword = "123456"; //PIN certmgr.ListStoreCertificates(); sftp.SSHCert = new Certificate(CertStoreTypes.cstPKCS11, secKeyBlob, "123456", "*"); sftp.SSHUser = "test"; sftp.SSHLogon("myhost", 22);

99 (cstAuto)The store type is automatically detected from the input data. This setting may be used with both public and private keys and can detect any of the supported formats automatically.

Data Type

Integer

SSLCertSubject Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This is the subject of the certificate used for client authentication.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetSSLCertSubject();
int SetSSLCertSubject(const char* lpszSSLCertSubject); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetSSLCertSubject();
INT SetSSLCertSubject(LPCWSTR lpszSSLCertSubject);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslcertsubject(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslcertsubject(void* lpObj, const char* lpszSSLCertSubject);
QString GetSSLCertSubject();
int SetSSLCertSubject(QString qsSSLCertSubject);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This is the subject of the certificate used for client authentication.

This property must be set after all other certificate properties are set. When this property is set, a search is performed in the current certificate store to locate a certificate with a matching subject.

If a matching certificate is found, the property is set to the full subject of the matching certificate.

If an exact match is not found, the store is searched for subjects containing the value of the property.

If a match is still not found, the property is set to an empty string, and no certificate is selected.

The special value "*" picks a random certificate in the certificate store.

The certificate subject is a comma-separated list of distinguished name fields and values. For instance, "CN=www.server.com, OU=test, C=US, E=support@nsoftware.com". Common fields and their meanings are as follows:

FieldMeaning
CNCommon Name. This is commonly a hostname like www.server.com.
OOrganization
OUOrganizational Unit
LLocality
SState
CCountry
EEmail Address

If a field value contains a comma, it must be quoted.

Data Type

String

SSLProvider Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This specifies the SSL/TLS implementation to use.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetSSLProvider();
int SetSSLProvider(int iSSLProvider); Unicode (Windows) INT GetSSLProvider();
INT SetSSLProvider(INT iSSLProvider);

Possible Values

SSLP_AUTOMATIC(0), 
SSLP_PLATFORM(1),
SSLP_INTERNAL(2)
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslprovider(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setsslprovider(void* lpObj, int iSSLProvider);
int GetSSLProvider();
int SetSSLProvider(int iSSLProvider);

Default Value

0

Remarks

This property specifies the SSL/TLS implementation to use. In most cases the default value of 0 (Automatic) is recommended and should not be changed. When set to 0 (Automatic) the class will select whether to use the platform implementation or the internal implementation depending on the operating system as well as the TLS version being used.

Possible values are:

0 (sslpAutomatic - default)Automatically selects the appropriate implementation.
1 (sslpPlatform) Uses the platform/system implementation.
2 (sslpInternal) Uses the internal implementation.
Additional Notes

In most cases using the default value (Automatic) is recommended. The class will select a provider depending on the current platform.

When Automatic is selected, on Windows the class will use the platform implementation. On Linux/macOS the class will use the internal implementation. When TLS 1.3 is enabled via SSLEnabledProtocols the internal implementation is used on all platforms.

Data Type

Integer

SSLServerCertEncoded Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This is the certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded).

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetSSLServerCertEncoded(char* &lpSSLServerCertEncoded, int &lenSSLServerCertEncoded);

Unicode (Windows)
INT GetSSLServerCertEncoded(LPSTR &lpSSLServerCertEncoded, INT &lenSSLServerCertEncoded);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getsslservercertencoded(void* lpObj, char** lpSSLServerCertEncoded, int* lenSSLServerCertEncoded);
QByteArray GetSSLServerCertEncoded();

Default Value

""

Remarks

This is the certificate (PEM/Base64 encoded). This property is used to assign a specific certificate. The SSLServerCertStore and SSLServerCertSubject properties also may be used to specify a certificate.

When SSLServerCertEncoded is set, a search is initiated in the current SSLServerCertStore for the private key of the certificate. If the key is found, SSLServerCertSubject is updated to reflect the full subject of the selected certificate; otherwise, SSLServerCertSubject is set to an empty string.

This property is read-only and not available at design time.

Data Type

Binary String

STAN Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The merchant assigned System Trace Audit Number(STAN).

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetSTAN();
int SetSTAN(const char* lpszSTAN); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetSTAN();
INT SetSTAN(LPCWSTR lpszSTAN);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getstan(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setstan(void* lpObj, const char* lpszSTAN);
QString GetSTAN();
int SetSTAN(QString qsSTAN);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property represents a six digit number assigned by the merchant to uniquely reference the transaction. This number must be unique within a day per Merchant ID and Terminal ID.

Valid values are from 000001 to 999999 inclusive.

Data Type

String

Timeout Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

A timeout for the class.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int GetTimeout();
int SetTimeout(int iTimeout); Unicode (Windows) INT GetTimeout();
INT SetTimeout(INT iTimeout);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_gettimeout(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_settimeout(void* lpObj, int iTimeout);
int GetTimeout();
int SetTimeout(int iTimeout);

Default Value

30

Remarks

If Timeout is set to a positive value, and an operation cannot be completed immediately, the class will return with an error after Timeout seconds.

The default value for Timeout is 30 (seconds).

Data Type

Integer

TPPID Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Third Party Processor Identifier assigned by FDMS.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetTPPID();
int SetTPPID(const char* lpszTPPID); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetTPPID();
INT SetTPPID(LPCWSTR lpszTPPID);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_gettppid(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_settppid(void* lpObj, const char* lpszTPPID);
QString GetTPPID();
int SetTPPID(QString qsTPPID);

Default Value

""

Remarks

The Third Party Processor Identifier (TPPID. Also sometimes referred to as a "Vendor Id") is assigned by FDMS to each third party who is processing transactions. Each merchant will receive a TPPID from FDMS.

The default value is "" (empty string). This should be set to the FDMS assigned TPPID.

A VisaIdentifier is also required for Visa transactions.

Data Type

String

TransactionAmount Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The transaction amount to be authorized.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetTransactionAmount();
int SetTransactionAmount(const char* lpszTransactionAmount); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetTransactionAmount();
INT SetTransactionAmount(LPCWSTR lpszTransactionAmount);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_gettransactionamount(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_settransactionamount(void* lpObj, const char* lpszTransactionAmount);
QString GetTransactionAmount();
int SetTransactionAmount(QString qsTransactionAmount);

Default Value

""

Remarks

This property contains the transaction amount to be authorized.

This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.

The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.

Data Type

String

TransactionNumber Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Uniquely identifies the transaction.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetTransactionNumber();
int SetTransactionNumber(const char* lpszTransactionNumber); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetTransactionNumber();
INT SetTransactionNumber(LPCWSTR lpszTransactionNumber);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_gettransactionnumber(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_settransactionnumber(void* lpObj, const char* lpszTransactionNumber);
QString GetTransactionNumber();
int SetTransactionNumber(QString qsTransactionNumber);

Default Value

""

Remarks

The TransactionNumber (otherwise known as the Client Reference Number, or ClientRef) uniquely identifies the packet sent by the application to the Datawire system. This parameter stores some unique token of information, and is used to match the response to the initial request sent. For example, the client application could use a static counter that is increased with the each executed request.

For all classs except FDMSGiftCard the maximum length of this property is 14 alphanumeric characters.

The FDMS recommended format is "tttttttVnnnnrrr" where ttttttt is a 7 digit transaction id, V is a constant, and nnn is a 3 digit version number and rrr is a 3 digit revision number. The 6 digit version number is typically static but unique for an application (Example: Version 2.5 = tttttttV002500).

For the Rapid Connect platform, the 6 character version number should be your Project/TPPID value. The entire TransactionNumber must be unique within a 24 hour time period.

The FDMSGiftCard also passes this value to the FDMS Closed Loop Gift Card system as a transaction id, and therefore the following restrictions are enforced: The maximum length is 7 characters. If the first character is an 'X', the remaining characters must be in the range '0' through 'F', indicating a hexadecimal number. Otherwise the FDMS Closed Loop Gift Card system only allows digits in this property.

Data Type

String

URL Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Location of the Datawire server to which transactions are sent.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetURL();
int SetURL(const char* lpszURL); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetURL();
INT SetURL(LPCWSTR lpszURL);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_geturl(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_seturl(void* lpObj, const char* lpszURL);
QString GetURL();
int SetURL(QString qsURL);

Default Value

"https://staging1.datawire.net/sd/"

Remarks

This is the URL to which all authorization and settlement transactions are sent. This URL is acquired by using the FDMSRegister class. Once you Register and Activate the merchant using the FDMSRegister class, you may then do a Service Discovery. After sending a Service Discovery transaction, the Datawire system will return a list of transaction URLs. The URL from this list with the shortest round-trip transit time from a ping is the URL you should use here.

Note: By default, this property is populated with the Datawire Staging (test) server, and is not the correct URL to use in a production environment. In a production environment, this URL is supplied by the FDMSRegister class.

Data Type

String

VisaIdentifier Property (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Additional merchant identification field used when authorizing Visa transactions.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetVisaIdentifier();
int SetVisaIdentifier(const char* lpszVisaIdentifier); Unicode (Windows) LPWSTR GetVisaIdentifier();
INT SetVisaIdentifier(LPCWSTR lpszVisaIdentifier);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getvisaidentifier(void* lpObj);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setvisaidentifier(void* lpObj, const char* lpszVisaIdentifier);
QString GetVisaIdentifier();
int SetVisaIdentifier(QString qsVisaIdentifier);

Default Value

""

Remarks

First Data will require the Agent Identification Service from all Third Party Servicers (TPS) or Merchant Servicers (MS). Each Visa Agent Identifier in the chain is composed of the following pieces:

First (up to) 10 bytes: The Business Identifier (BID) provided by Visa to Third Party Servicers (TPS). This value may be less than 10 bytes.
Final 12 bytes: Text representation of the hexadecimal Visa secret Agent Unique Account Result (AUAR). {0x01, 0x02, 0x03, 0x04, 0x05, 0xFF} will be represented as "0102030405FF".
If there are multiple visa identifiers they may be added by setting VisaIdentifier with a comma-delimited list. There can be a maximum of three entries in this list.

A VisaIdentifier (Agent Identification Service - AUAR) is required for Visa transactions. A VisaIdentifier value is assigned by Visa as part of their Trusted Agent Program (TAP). Therefore it is suggested that you contact your FDMS certification analyst as they should be able to provide you with further information and put you in contact with the required party at Visa. Unfortunately more specific information on this matter cannot be provided as we do not handle live customer data and thus are not required to register in this particular program. However below is some additional information in regards to the requirements of a Visa Identifier.

Any merchant that transmits, processes, or stores cardholder data on server(s) that you own, manage, or operate on behalf of your clients (who are other merchant account holders) must meet the PCI Data Security Standard and follow additional steps to register as a service provider. Applicable services commonly include webhosting, software as a service, or collecting payment on behalf of a client. Any company providing these services must register with Visa's Third Party Agent (TAP) program.

You can register for the Visa Third Party Agent Program at http://usa.visa.com/merchants/risk_management/third-party-registration.html

If you find that you are not required to register with this program you can send all spaces for the BID and all zeros for the AUAR for instance: " 000000000000"

Data Type

String

AuthOnly Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Performs an authorization request.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int AuthOnly();

Unicode (Windows)
INT AuthOnly();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_authonly(void* lpObj);
int AuthOnly();

Remarks

This method performs an authorization request. This transaction places a hold on the funds. To capture the funds the Capture method must be called.

After calling this method call GetDetailAggregate to generate a detail aggregate. The detail aggregate should be saved for use with Capture or Reverse later.

When ready to Capture or Reverse the transaction call SetDetailAggregate to the previously stored detail aggregate before calling the method.

After this method returns check the value of ResponseCode to determine if the transaction was successful.

Important Note: You must ping your list of service provider URLs and update the URL property to the service provider with the shortest response time every 100 transactions, as well as when your application initially starts. This is not a normal ICMP ping - to determine the fastest transaction URL you must use the special Ping method inside the FDMSRegister class. (You may update your list of service provider URLs with the FDMSRegister class's ServiceDiscovery method).

Retail AuthOnly Example retail.TPPID = "AAA000"; retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001"; retail.MerchantId = "1234"; retail.GroupId = "20001"; retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566"; retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc"; retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN"; retail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail; retail.STAN = "112"; retail.TransactionNumber = "1234"; retail.OrderNumber = "123"; retail.TransactionAmount = "1200"; retail.ReferenceNumber = "123"; retail.Card.MagneticStripe = "B4012000033330026^FDCS TEST CARD /VISA^170410054321000000000000000 150 A"; retail.Card.EntryDataSource = EntryDataSources.edsTrack1; retail.AuthOnly();

Error Handling (C++)

This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)

BalanceInquiry Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Performs a Balance Inquiry Request using the specified Card data.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int BalanceInquiry();

Unicode (Windows)
INT BalanceInquiry();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_balanceinquiry(void* lpObj);
int BalanceInquiry();

Remarks

This methods allows you to perform a Balance Inquiry Request using the specified Card data. The balance amount will be returned via ResponseBalance. Note that Balance Inquiries do not place a hold on a cardholder's funds and are not captured.

Note: This method is only applicable to swiped MasterCards.

Error Handling (C++)

This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)

Capture Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Captures a previously authorized transaction.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int Capture();

Unicode (Windows)
INT Capture();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_capture(void* lpObj);
int Capture();

Remarks

This method captures a previously authorized transaction. Before calling this method call SetDetailAggregate to specify the detail aggregate from the original AuthOnly transaction.

After this method returns check the value of ResponseCode to determine if the transaction was successful.

FDMS Recommendations:

Vendors/Gateways, who systematically send all Capture transactions during their end of day processing or at a specific time for their entire chain, must configure/program their systems to send the Capture transactions for all locations or merchants varying times of day based on the MerchantId or MerchantTerminalNumber (whichever provides a more random value).

To assist with implementing this logic, FDMS Rapid Connect recommends sending the Capture transactions based on the MerchantTerminalNumber in each location. For example If the last digit of the MerchantTerminalNumber is 0, set the time for the Capture transactions to be sent as xx:00 (xx=hh:00=mm). The time for the MerchantTerminalNumber ending with 1 would be xx:05. The time for the MerchantTerminalNumber ending with 2 would be xx:10. All remaining MerchantTerminalNumbers would follow this same logic. This logic would be applied across the entire chain or merchant base, to ensure that all Captures for all merchants are not systematically sent to First Data at the same time. FDMS recommends that the software calculate the offset of time based on the MerchantId or MerchantTerminalNumber, and not rely on a user to specify the time as noted above.

Important Note: You must ping your list of service provider URLs and update the URL property to the service provider with the shortest response time every 100 transactions, as well as when your application initially starts. This is not a normal ICMP ping - to determine the fastest transaction URL you must use the special Ping method inside the FDMSRegister class. (You may update your list of service provider URLs with the FDMSRegister class's ServiceDiscovery method).

Retail AuthOnly and Capture Example retail.TPPID = "AAA000"; retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001"; retail.MerchantId = "1234"; retail.GroupId = "20001"; retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566"; retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc"; retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN"; retail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail; retail.STAN = "112"; retail.TransactionNumber = "1234"; retail.OrderNumber = "123"; retail.ReferenceNumber = "123456"; retail.TransactionAmount = "1200"; retail.Card.MagneticStripe = "B4012000033330026^FDCS TEST CARD /VISA^170410054321000000000000000 150 A"; retail.Card.EntryDataSource = EntryDataSources.edsTrack1; retail.AuthOnly(); string aggregate = retail.GetDetailAggregate(); //Capture retail = new Fdmsrcretail(); retail.TPPID = "AAA000"; retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001"; retail.MerchantId = "1234"; retail.GroupId = "20001"; retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566"; retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc"; retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN"; retail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail; retail.STAN = "113"; retail.TransactionNumber = "1235"; retail.ReferenceNumber = "123457"; retail.SetDetailAggregate(aggregate); //The TransactionAmount is populated when SetDetailAggregate is called. //TransactionAmount may be set to a different amount when capturing, //for instance to include Gratuity. retail.TransactionAmount = "1600"; retail.Capture();

Error Handling (C++)

This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)

Config Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Sets or retrieves a configuration setting.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* Config(const char* lpszConfigurationString);

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR Config(LPCWSTR lpszConfigurationString);
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_config(void* lpObj, const char* lpszConfigurationString);
QString Config(const QString& qsConfigurationString);

Remarks

Config is a generic method available in every class. It is used to set and retrieve configuration settings for the class.

These settings are similar in functionality to properties, but they are rarely used. In order to avoid "polluting" the property namespace of the class, access to these internal properties is provided through the Config method.

To set a configuration setting named PROPERTY, you must call Config("PROPERTY=VALUE"), where VALUE is the value of the setting expressed as a string. For boolean values, use the strings "True", "False", "0", "1", "Yes", or "No" (case does not matter).

To read (query) the value of a configuration setting, you must call Config("PROPERTY"). The value will be returned as a string.

Error Handling (C++)

This method returns a String value; after it returns, call the GetLastErrorCode() method to obtain its result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message.

Credit Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Submits a credit transaction.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int Credit();

Unicode (Windows)
INT Credit();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_credit(void* lpObj);
int Credit();

Remarks

This method credits funds to the card. This is not based on a previous transaction. This may be used to return funds to a card if a previous transaction has already been settled. To void or cancel a transaction before it has been settled call Reverse instead.

After this method returns check the value of ResponseCode to determine if the transaction was successful.

Important Note: You must ping your list of service provider URLs and update the URL property to the service provider with the shortest response time every 100 transactions, as well as when your application initially starts. This is not a normal ICMP ping - to determine the fastest transaction URL you must use the special Ping method inside the FDMSRegister class. (You may update your list of service provider URLs with the FDMSRegister class's ServiceDiscovery method).

Retail Credit Example retail.TPPID = "AAA000"; retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001"; retail.MerchantId = "1234"; retail.GroupId = "20001"; retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566"; retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc"; retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN"; retail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail; retail.STAN = "112"; retail.TransactionNumber = "1234"; retail.OrderNumber = "123"; retail.ReferenceNumber = "123"; retail.TransactionAmount = "1200"; retail.Card.MagneticStripe = "B4012000033330026^FDCS TEST CARD /VISA^170410054321000000000000000 150 A"; retail.Card.EntryDataSource = EntryDataSources.edsTrack1; retail.Credit(); ;

Error Handling (C++)

This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)

GetDetailAggregate Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Returns a detail aggregate containing details of this transaction, which is used for Capture or Reverse transactions or settlement when using Terminal Capture mode.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
char* GetDetailAggregate();

Unicode (Windows)
LPWSTR GetDetailAggregate();
char* dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_getdetailaggregate(void* lpObj);
QString GetDetailAggregate();

Remarks

This method will return a detail aggregate representing the transaction. After calling AuthOnly or Sale call this method to obtain a detail aggregate. The aggregate will be required when calling Capture or Reverse.

When using Terminal Capture Settlement Mode this aggregate must be passed to the FDMSRcSettle class's DetailAggregate array property in order to settle the transaction. If you wish to view or change any part of the aggregate (such as adding a gratuity or additional info for an Installment payment), you may use the FDMSRcDetailrecord class to do so.

Note: This method may only be called after a successful authorization. If the authorization was not successful the method fails with an error.

To set the aggregate before calling Capture Reverse or SendSettlement call SetDetailAggregate. Save this aggregate in a secure location.

Error Handling (C++)

This method returns a String value; after it returns, call the GetLastErrorCode() method to obtain its result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message.

HostTotals Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Performs a Host Totals request.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int HostTotals();

Unicode (Windows)
INT HostTotals();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_hosttotals(void* lpObj);
int HostTotals();

Remarks

This method performs a Host Totals transaction submitted to request a Host Totals Report for a particular day.

You need to set the required merchant password and report type fields using the HostTotalsPassword and HostTotalsType configuration settings, respectively.

Retail HostTotals Example retail.TPPID = "AAA000"; retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001"; retail.MerchantId = "1234"; retail.GroupId = "20001"; retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566"; retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc"; retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN"; retail.STAN = "112"; retail.TransactionNumber = "1234"; retail.Config("CurrencyCode=840"); retail.Config("HostTotalsType=1"); retail.Config("HostTotalsPassword=111111"); retail.HostTotals();

Error Handling (C++)

This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)

Interrupt Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Interrupts the current action.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int Interrupt();

Unicode (Windows)
INT Interrupt();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_interrupt(void* lpObj);
int Interrupt();

Remarks

This method interrupts any processing that the class is currently executing.

Error Handling (C++)

This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)

Reset Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Clears all properties to their default values.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int Reset();

Unicode (Windows)
INT Reset();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_reset(void* lpObj);
int Reset();

Remarks

This method clears all properties to their default values.

Error Handling (C++)

This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)

Reverse Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Reverses a transaction.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int Reverse();

Unicode (Windows)
INT Reverse();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_reverse(void* lpObj);
int Reverse();

Remarks

This method reverses a transaction that has not been settled.

To void/reverse a Sale or AuthOnly transaction first set ReversalTransactionType to specify the type of original transaction that is being reversed. Next set ReversalType to frtFullReversal and call this method.

If the previous transaction did not receive a response and the state of the transaction is uncertain you may perform a Timeout Reversal. To perform a timeout reversal set ReversalTransactionType to specify the type of original transaction that is being reversed. Next set ReversalType to frtTimeoutReversal and call this method.

Timeout Reversals are applicable to the following transaction types:

Full Reversals are applicable to the following transaction types:

After this method returns check the value of ResponseCode to determine if the transaction was successful.

Important Note: You must ping your list of service provider URLs and update the URL property to the service provider with the shortest response time every 100 transactions, as well as when your application initially starts. This is not a normal ICMP ping - to determine the fastest transaction URL you must use the special Ping method inside the FDMSRegister class. (You may update your list of service provider URLs with the FDMSRegister class's ServiceDiscovery method).

Retail Sale and Reverse Example retail.TPPID = "AAA000"; retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001"; retail.MerchantId = "1234"; retail.GroupId = "20001"; retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566"; retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc"; retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN"; retail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail; retail.STAN = "112"; retail.TransactionNumber = "1234"; retail.OrderNumber = "123"; retail.ReferenceNumber = "123"; retail.TransactionAmount = "1200"; retail.Card.MagneticStripe = "B4012000033330026^FDCS TEST CARD /VISA^170410054321000000000000000 150 A"; retail.Card.EntryDataSource = EntryDataSources.edsTrack1; retail.Sale(); string aggregate = retail.GetDetailAggregate(); //Reverse retail = new Fdmsrcretail(); retail.TPPID = "AAA000"; retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001"; retail.MerchantId = "1234"; retail.GroupId = "20001"; retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566"; retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc"; retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN"; retail.STAN = "113"; retail.TransactionNumber = "1235"; retail.ReferenceNumber = "123457"; retail.SetDetailAggregate(aggregate); retail.Reverse();

Error Handling (C++)

This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)

Sale Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Performs a sale transaction.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int Sale();

Unicode (Windows)
INT Sale();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_sale(void* lpObj);
int Sale();

Remarks

This method performs a sale transaction. Once a sale is performed no further action is needed, the funds will automatically be captured by FDMS.

After this method returns check the value of ResponseCode to determine if the transaction was successful.

Important Note: You must ping your list of service provider URLs and update the URL property to the service provider with the shortest response time every 100 transactions, as well as when your application initially starts. This is not a normal ICMP ping - to determine the fastest transaction URL you must use the special Ping method inside the FDMSRegister class. (You may update your list of service provider URLs with the FDMSRegister class's ServiceDiscovery method).

Retail Sale Example retail.TPPID = "AAA000"; retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001"; retail.MerchantId = "1234"; retail.GroupId = "20001"; retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566"; retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc"; retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN"; retail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail; retail.STAN = "112"; retail.TransactionNumber = "1234"; retail.OrderNumber = "123"; retail.ReferenceNumber = "123"; retail.TransactionAmount = "1200"; retail.Card.MagneticStripe = "B4012000033330026^FDCS TEST CARD /VISA^170410054321000000000000000 150 A"; retail.Card.EntryDataSource = EntryDataSources.edsTrack1; retail.Sale();

Error Handling (C++)

This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)

SetDetailAggregate Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Specifies the detail aggregate before calling Capture or Reverse.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int SetDetailAggregate(const char* lpszaggregate);

Unicode (Windows)
INT SetDetailAggregate(LPCWSTR lpszaggregate);
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_setdetailaggregate(void* lpObj, const char* lpszaggregate);
int SetDetailAggregate(const QString& qsaggregate);

Remarks

This method specifies the detail aggregate from the original AuthOnly or Sale transaction. This must be set before calling Capture or Reverse.

The aggregate specified here should have been obtained from the GetDetailAggregate method after the original AuthOnly or Sale transaction.

Error Handling (C++)

This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)

VerifyCard Method (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Performs a zero dollar verification of the card.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
int VerifyCard();

Unicode (Windows)
INT VerifyCard();
int dpaymentssdk_fdmsrcretail_verifycard(void* lpObj);
int VerifyCard();

Remarks

This method performs a card verification without charging any funds. This can be used to simply verify if the card is valid, or perform AVS and CVV checks without actually charging any funds to the card.

When calling this method TransactionAmount must be set to 0. Set either CustomerAddress or CustomerZip to perform AVS checks. Set CardCVVData to perform CVV checks.

The following combinations are supported:

Card TypeVerificationw/ AVSw/ CVVw/ AVS and CVVSwiped w/ AVS
Visa Y Y Y N Y
MasterCard Y Y Y Y Y
American ExpressN Y N N Y
Discover Y Y Y Y Y
JCB (Domestic US)N N N N N
Diners Club Y Y Y Y Y

Important Note: You must ping your list of service provider URLs and update the URL property to the service provider with the shortest response time every 100 transactions, as well as when your application initially starts. This is not a normal ICMP ping - to determine the fastest transaction URL you must use the special Ping method inside the FDMSRegister class. (You may update your list of service provider URLs with the FDMSRegister class's ServiceDiscovery method).

Retail VerifyCard Example retail.TPPID = "AAA000"; retail.MerchantTerminalNumber = "00000001"; retail.MerchantId = "1234"; retail.GroupId = "20001"; retail.DatawireId = "00011122233344455566"; retail.ApplicationId = "RAPIDCONNECTVXN"; retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc"; retail.IndustryType = FdmsrcretailIndustryTypes.fritRetail; retail.URL = "https://stg.dw.us.fdcnet.biz/rc"; retail.STAN = "112"; retail.TransactionNumber = "1234"; retail.ReferenceNumber = "123"; retail.TransactionAmount = "0"; retail.CustomerZip = "11747"; //Card data can be swiped or manually keyed retail.Card.Number = "373953123443227"; retail.Card.ExpMonth = 12; retail.Card.ExpYear = 2018; retail.Card.EntryDataSource = EntryDataSources.edsManualEntryTrack1Capable; retail.VerifyCard();

Error Handling (C++)

This method returns a result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message. (Note: This method's result code can also be obtained by calling the GetLastErrorCode() method after it returns.)

Connected Event (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This event is fired immediately after a connection completes (or fails).

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
virtual int FireConnected(FDMSRcRetailConnectedEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
int StatusCode;
const char *Description; int reserved; } FDMSRcRetailConnectedEventParams;
Unicode (Windows) virtual INT FireConnected(FDMSRcRetailConnectedEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
INT StatusCode;
LPCWSTR Description; INT reserved; } FDMSRcRetailConnectedEventParams;
#define EID_FDMSRCRETAIL_CONNECTED 1

virtual INT DPAYMENTSSDK_CALL FireConnected(INT &iStatusCode, LPSTR &lpszDescription);
class FDMSRcRetailConnectedEventParams {
public:
  int StatusCode();

  const QString &Description();

  int EventRetVal();
  void SetEventRetVal(int iRetVal);
};
// To handle, connect one or more slots to this signal. void Connected(FDMSRcRetailConnectedEventParams *e);
// Or, subclass FDMSRcRetail and override this emitter function. virtual int FireConnected(FDMSRcRetailConnectedEventParams *e) {...}

Remarks

If the connection is made normally, StatusCode is 0 and Description is "OK".

If the connection fails, StatusCode has the error code returned by the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)/IP stack. Description contains a description of this code. The value of StatusCode is equal to the value of the error.

Please refer to the Error Codes section for more information.

DataPacketIn Event (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Fired when receiving a data packet from the transaction server.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
virtual int FireDataPacketIn(FDMSRcRetailDataPacketInEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
const char *DataPacket; int lenDataPacket; int reserved; } FDMSRcRetailDataPacketInEventParams;
Unicode (Windows) virtual INT FireDataPacketIn(FDMSRcRetailDataPacketInEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
LPCSTR DataPacket; INT lenDataPacket; INT reserved; } FDMSRcRetailDataPacketInEventParams;
#define EID_FDMSRCRETAIL_DATAPACKETIN 2

virtual INT DPAYMENTSSDK_CALL FireDataPacketIn(LPSTR &lpDataPacket, INT &lenDataPacket);
class FDMSRcRetailDataPacketInEventParams {
public:
  const QByteArray &DataPacket();

  int EventRetVal();
  void SetEventRetVal(int iRetVal);
};
// To handle, connect one or more slots to this signal. void DataPacketIn(FDMSRcRetailDataPacketInEventParams *e);
// Or, subclass FDMSRcRetail and override this emitter function. virtual int FireDataPacketIn(FDMSRcRetailDataPacketInEventParams *e) {...}

Remarks

This event fires when a packet is received. The entire data packet (including all framing and error detection characters) is contained in the parameter "DataPacket". This parameter may be inspected for advanced troubleshooting, or to extract additional response properties beyond the scope of this class.

DataPacketOut Event (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Fired when sending a data packet to the transaction server.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
virtual int FireDataPacketOut(FDMSRcRetailDataPacketOutEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
const char *DataPacket; int lenDataPacket; int reserved; } FDMSRcRetailDataPacketOutEventParams;
Unicode (Windows) virtual INT FireDataPacketOut(FDMSRcRetailDataPacketOutEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
LPCSTR DataPacket; INT lenDataPacket; INT reserved; } FDMSRcRetailDataPacketOutEventParams;
#define EID_FDMSRCRETAIL_DATAPACKETOUT 3

virtual INT DPAYMENTSSDK_CALL FireDataPacketOut(LPSTR &lpDataPacket, INT &lenDataPacket);
class FDMSRcRetailDataPacketOutEventParams {
public:
  const QByteArray &DataPacket();

  int EventRetVal();
  void SetEventRetVal(int iRetVal);
};
// To handle, connect one or more slots to this signal. void DataPacketOut(FDMSRcRetailDataPacketOutEventParams *e);
// Or, subclass FDMSRcRetail and override this emitter function. virtual int FireDataPacketOut(FDMSRcRetailDataPacketOutEventParams *e) {...}

Remarks

This event fires right before each data packet is sent. The entire data packet (including all framing and error detection characters) is contained in the parameter "DataPacket". This parameter may be inspected for advanced troubleshooting, or may be modified to support additional features beyond the scope of this class.

Disconnected Event (FDMSRcRetail Class)

This event is fired when a connection is closed.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
virtual int FireDisconnected(FDMSRcRetailDisconnectedEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
int StatusCode;
const char *Description; int reserved; } FDMSRcRetailDisconnectedEventParams;
Unicode (Windows) virtual INT FireDisconnected(FDMSRcRetailDisconnectedEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
INT StatusCode;
LPCWSTR Description; INT reserved; } FDMSRcRetailDisconnectedEventParams;
#define EID_FDMSRCRETAIL_DISCONNECTED 4

virtual INT DPAYMENTSSDK_CALL FireDisconnected(INT &iStatusCode, LPSTR &lpszDescription);
class FDMSRcRetailDisconnectedEventParams {
public:
  int StatusCode();

  const QString &Description();

  int EventRetVal();
  void SetEventRetVal(int iRetVal);
};
// To handle, connect one or more slots to this signal. void Disconnected(FDMSRcRetailDisconnectedEventParams *e);
// Or, subclass FDMSRcRetail and override this emitter function. virtual int FireDisconnected(FDMSRcRetailDisconnectedEventParams *e) {...}

Remarks

If the connection is broken normally, StatusCode is 0 and Description is "OK".

If the connection is broken for any other reason, StatusCode has the error code returned by the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP/IP) subsystem. Description contains a description of this code. The value of StatusCode is equal to the value of the TCP/IP error.

Please refer to the Error Codes section for more information.

Error Event (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Fired when information is available about errors during data delivery.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
virtual int FireError(FDMSRcRetailErrorEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
int ErrorCode;
const char *Description; int reserved; } FDMSRcRetailErrorEventParams;
Unicode (Windows) virtual INT FireError(FDMSRcRetailErrorEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
INT ErrorCode;
LPCWSTR Description; INT reserved; } FDMSRcRetailErrorEventParams;
#define EID_FDMSRCRETAIL_ERROR 5

virtual INT DPAYMENTSSDK_CALL FireError(INT &iErrorCode, LPSTR &lpszDescription);
class FDMSRcRetailErrorEventParams {
public:
  int ErrorCode();

  const QString &Description();

  int EventRetVal();
  void SetEventRetVal(int iRetVal);
};
// To handle, connect one or more slots to this signal. void Error(FDMSRcRetailErrorEventParams *e);
// Or, subclass FDMSRcRetail and override this emitter function. virtual int FireError(FDMSRcRetailErrorEventParams *e) {...}

Remarks

The Error event is fired in case of exceptional conditions during message processing. Normally the class fails with an error.

The ErrorCode parameter contains an error code, and the Description parameter contains a textual description of the error. For a list of valid error codes and their descriptions, please refer to the Error Codes section.

SSLServerAuthentication Event (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Fired after the server presents its certificate to the client.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
virtual int FireSSLServerAuthentication(FDMSRcRetailSSLServerAuthenticationEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
const char *CertEncoded; int lenCertEncoded;
const char *CertSubject;
const char *CertIssuer;
const char *Status;
int Accept; int reserved; } FDMSRcRetailSSLServerAuthenticationEventParams;
Unicode (Windows) virtual INT FireSSLServerAuthentication(FDMSRcRetailSSLServerAuthenticationEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
LPCSTR CertEncoded; INT lenCertEncoded;
LPCWSTR CertSubject;
LPCWSTR CertIssuer;
LPCWSTR Status;
BOOL Accept; INT reserved; } FDMSRcRetailSSLServerAuthenticationEventParams;
#define EID_FDMSRCRETAIL_SSLSERVERAUTHENTICATION 6

virtual INT DPAYMENTSSDK_CALL FireSSLServerAuthentication(LPSTR &lpCertEncoded, INT &lenCertEncoded, LPSTR &lpszCertSubject, LPSTR &lpszCertIssuer, LPSTR &lpszStatus, BOOL &bAccept);
class FDMSRcRetailSSLServerAuthenticationEventParams {
public:
  const QByteArray &CertEncoded();

  const QString &CertSubject();

  const QString &CertIssuer();

  const QString &Status();

  bool Accept();
  void SetAccept(bool bAccept);

  int EventRetVal();
  void SetEventRetVal(int iRetVal);
};
// To handle, connect one or more slots to this signal. void SSLServerAuthentication(FDMSRcRetailSSLServerAuthenticationEventParams *e);
// Or, subclass FDMSRcRetail and override this emitter function. virtual int FireSSLServerAuthentication(FDMSRcRetailSSLServerAuthenticationEventParams *e) {...}

Remarks

During this event, the client can decide whether or not to continue with the connection process. The Accept parameter is a recommendation on whether to continue or close the connection. This is just a suggestion: application software must use its own logic to determine whether or not to continue.

When Accept is False, Status shows why the verification failed (otherwise, Status contains the string OK). If it is decided to continue, you can override and accept the certificate by setting the Accept parameter to True.

SSLStatus Event (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Fired when secure connection progress messages are available.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
virtual int FireSSLStatus(FDMSRcRetailSSLStatusEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
const char *Message; int reserved; } FDMSRcRetailSSLStatusEventParams;
Unicode (Windows) virtual INT FireSSLStatus(FDMSRcRetailSSLStatusEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
LPCWSTR Message; INT reserved; } FDMSRcRetailSSLStatusEventParams;
#define EID_FDMSRCRETAIL_SSLSTATUS 7

virtual INT DPAYMENTSSDK_CALL FireSSLStatus(LPSTR &lpszMessage);
class FDMSRcRetailSSLStatusEventParams {
public:
  const QString &Message();

  int EventRetVal();
  void SetEventRetVal(int iRetVal);
};
// To handle, connect one or more slots to this signal. void SSLStatus(FDMSRcRetailSSLStatusEventParams *e);
// Or, subclass FDMSRcRetail and override this emitter function. virtual int FireSSLStatus(FDMSRcRetailSSLStatusEventParams *e) {...}

Remarks

The event is fired for informational and logging purposes only. This event tracks the progress of the connection.

Status Event (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Shows the progress of the FDMS/Datawire connection.

Syntax

ANSI (Cross Platform)
virtual int FireStatus(FDMSRcRetailStatusEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
const char *Message; int reserved; } FDMSRcRetailStatusEventParams;
Unicode (Windows) virtual INT FireStatus(FDMSRcRetailStatusEventParams *e);
typedef struct {
LPCWSTR Message; INT reserved; } FDMSRcRetailStatusEventParams;
#define EID_FDMSRCRETAIL_STATUS 8

virtual INT DPAYMENTSSDK_CALL FireStatus(LPSTR &lpszMessage);
class FDMSRcRetailStatusEventParams {
public:
  const QString &Message();

  int EventRetVal();
  void SetEventRetVal(int iRetVal);
};
// To handle, connect one or more slots to this signal. void Status(FDMSRcRetailStatusEventParams *e);
// Or, subclass FDMSRcRetail and override this emitter function. virtual int FireStatus(FDMSRcRetailStatusEventParams *e) {...}

Remarks

The event is fired for informational and logging purposes only. Used to track the progress of the connection.

Config Settings (FDMSRcRetail Class)

The class accepts one or more of the following configuration settings. Configuration settings are similar in functionality to properties, but they are rarely used. In order to avoid "polluting" the property namespace of the class, access to these internal properties is provided through the Config method.

FDMSRcRetail Config Settings

ACI:   Authorization Characteristics Indicator.

A mandatory code used for qualification in the Visa Custom Payment Service (CPS) program, MasterCard Preferred Rate program, or to identify an Incremental transaction. The following table provides a summary of the codes currently supported by Visa, MasterCard, and Discover.

ValueVisaMastercardDiscover
P X X Preferred Rate/Customer Status (Lodging or Auto Rental)
I X X X Incremental Authorization
Y (Default) X Transaction requests participation
R X Card-not-present, AVS not required (permitted for certain MCCs only)
AllowPartialAuths:   Indicates whether partial authorizations are supported.

This setting specifies whether partial authorizations are supported. Partial authorization support is generally required for all merchants in card-present environments. The merchant may be subject to fees, interchange downgrades, or both if this is not supported in a retail environment. Support for partial authorizations is optional in ECommerce transactions but is highly recommended. The default value is True.

AltMerchantAddress:   The alternative merchant address.

This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant address to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value may be up to 25 characters in length.

AltMerchantCity:   The alternative merchant city.

This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant city to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value may be up to 20 characters in length.

AltMerchantCountryCode:   The alternative merchant country code.

This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant country code to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value is the ISO 3166 three digit numeric identifier.

AltMerchantEmail:   The alternative merchant email.

This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant email address be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value may be up to 40 characters in length.

AltMerchantName:   The alternative merchant name.

This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant name to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value may be up to 30 characters in length.

AltMerchantState:   The alternative merchant state.

This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant state to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value is the two characters state abbreviation.

AltMerchantZip:   The alternative merchant zip code.

This setting may be set to specify an alternative merchant zip code to be used in lieu of the one on file with FDMS. This value may be up to 9 characters in length.

AuthIndicator:   Indicate the type of authorization requested.

Possible values are:

1 Re-authorization (Visa and Discover only)
2 Resubmission (Visa and Discover only)
3 Estimated Authorization (Visa only)
4 Credential on File (Visa, Discover, Amex, and Mastercard only)
AuthorizationIndicator:   Indicates whether the authorization is a final authorization.

This setting indicates whether the authorized amount is equal to the final captured amount. This is a mandatory MasterCard only field. The list of valid values is:

0 Preauthorization - The Settlement amount may be different than the amount authorized.
1 Final Authorization -The settlement amount must equal the approved authorized amount.

Note: When this field is set to '1' in the original transaction, you cannot send a Partial Reversal subsequent transaction. Set the AuthorizationIndicator to '0' when the settlement amount may be different than the approved amount authorized.

AuthSource:   Indicates the source of the decision for the Visa transaction.

This setting may be queried after a transaction to determine the source of the decision. This is only applicable to Visa transactions. Possible values are:

0 Timeout - Response Provided by STIP, Timed Out by Switch
1 Visa Stand-In Processing - Response Provided by STIP, Transaction Amount was Below Issuer Limit or Below Sliding Dollar Amount
2 Suppress Inquiry Mode - Response Provided by STIP, Issuer is in Suppress Inquiry (SI) Mode
3 Issuer Unavailable - Response Provided by STIP for One of the Following Reasons: Issuer was Not Available for Processing (for reasons other than being in SI Mode) or CCV or iCCV was Invalid and Visa has Acted on the Negative Results
4 Issuer - Response Provided by Issuer
CardInputMode:   The method used to input the card details.

This setting optionally specifies the method used to input the card number or track data. If not specified (default) the class will automatically determine the correct value based on CardEntryDataSource. This should only be set if there is a need to override the automatically determined value. Possible values are:

00 Unspecified
01 Manual (Key entered)
03 Barcode
04 OCR (Optical Character Reader)
05 Integrated Circuit Read (CVV data Reliable)
07 Contactless Integrated Circuit Read (Reliable)
08 AMEX Digital Wallet
09 MasterCard remote chip entry
10 Credential on File
79 EMV fallback to manual entry
80 EMV fallback to Magnetic Stripe entry
82 Contactless Mobile Commerce
86 EMV Transaction switched from Contactless to Contact entry
90 Magnetic Stripe - Track Read
91 Contactless Magnetic Stripe Read
95 Integrated Circuit Read (CVV data unreliable)
CardType:   Specifies the type of card.

By default the class will automatically determine the card type and submit the card type information in the transaction request. This setting may be set to override the automatically determined value and manually specify the type of card.

This should not be set unless there is a specific reason to do so.

Possible values are:

0 Invalid or unknown prefix, card type not known
1 Visa
2 MasterCard
3 American Express
4 Discover
5 Diners
6 JCB
7 Visa Electron
8 Maestro
9 China Union Pay

CITMITFrameIndicator:   CIT/MIT Frame Indicator (Mastercard only).

This 4-character field indicates whether the transaction was initiated by the Cardholder or the Merchant as well as providing more detail as to the type of stored credential being used for the transaction (Mastercard only).

Valid values are:

Customer Initiated Transaction (CIT)

ValueDescription
C101 Credential on File
C102 Standing Order (variable amount, fixed frequency)
C103 Subscription (fixed amount and fixed frequency)
C104 Installment

Merchant Initiated Transaction (MIT)

ValueDescription
M101 Unscheduled Credential on File
M102 Standing Order (variable amount, fixed frequency)
M103 Subscription (fixed amount and fixed frequency)
M104 Installment

Merchant Initiated Transaction (MIT) - Industry Practice

ValueDescription
M205 Partial Shipment
M206 Related/Delayed Charge
M207 No show Charge
M208 Resubmission

ClientTimeout:   Indicates timeout client application will wait for response.

This setting indicates the interval of time, in seconds, a client will wait for the response for any given request. Normally this value is set to a value 5 seconds less than the Timeout value to allow for a response to be received from Datawire. It may be changed independently by setting this configuration setting AFTER setting the Timeout property. Note that too small a value will cause Datawire to reject a transaction immediately.

CurrencyCode:   Currency Code for this transaction.

This field contains a three digit number assigned by the signing member or processor to identify the merchant's authorization currency. For US Dollars, use "840".

DebugTrace:   Whether to enable debug logging.

If set to True the Status event will fire with the raw request and response information. This is helpful for debugging.

DeviceTypeIndicator:   Defines the form factor used at the POS for MasterCard PayPass transactions.

This setting is required for contactless MasterCard transactions when CardInputMode is set to 07, 82, or 91. Possible values are:

0 Card
1 Mobile Network Operator (MNO) controlled removable secure element (SIM or UICC) personalized for use with a Mobile Phone or Smartphone
2 Key Fob
3 Watch
4 Mobile Tag
5 Wristband
6 Mobile Phone Case or Sleeve
7 Mobile Phone or Smartphone with a fixed (non-removable) secure element controlled by the MNO, for example, code division multiple accesses (CDMA).
8 Removable secure element not controlled by the MNO, for example, memory card personalized for use with a Mobile Phone or Smartphone.
9 Mobile Phone or Smartphone with a fixed (non- removable) secure element not controlled by the MNO.
10 MNO controlled removable secure element (SIM or UICC) personalized for use with a Tablet or E-Book reader.
11 Tablet or E-Book reader with a fixed (non- removable) secure element controlled by the MNO.
12 Removable secure element not controlled by the MNO, for example, (SD Card) personalized for use with a Tablet or E- Book reader.
13 Tablet or E-Book with fixed (non- removable) secure element not controlled by the MNO
Duration:   Length of hotel stay in days.

The number of days the guest stayed in the hotel, or the expected duration of stay when authorizing a reservation. This field must be between 1 and 99 days. Default value is 1.

ECI:   Identifies the security level of the ECommerce transaction.

This setting specifies the security level of the ECommerce transaction. In most cases this does not need to be changed. A common reason for modifying this value is when supplying 3-D secure values. Possible values are:

01 Merchant is 3-D Secure capable and the cardholder information is fully authenticated.
02 Merchant is 3-D Secure capable but the cardholder was not authenticated. Use this value when authentication was attempted but the issuer is not participating in 3-D Secure, the cardholder is not participating in 3-D Secure, or the authentication server was not available.
03 3-D Secure was not attempted.
This is only applicable when IndustryType is set to Ecommerce or Hotel.
EMVOnlineKSN:   Clear-text Key Sequence Number for EMV Online PIN transactions.

This field is used along with EMVOnlinePIN to perform EMV online PIN transactions. The value of this property must be retrieved from a certified PIN pad device. This property is only valid for Card Present transactions. The maximum length is 20 characters.

EMVOnlinePIN:   DUKPT DES encrypted PIN block for EMV Online PIN transactions.

This field is used along with EMVOnlineKSN to perform EMV online PIN transactions. The value of this property must be retrieved from a certified PIN pad device. This property is only valid for Card Present transactions. The maximum length is 16 characters.

ExtraCharges:   List of extra charges for hotel transactions.

This property contains a six-character numeric value used to identify any additional ancillary charges that are booked to the cardholder's card after the transaction was completed. The merchant may enter one or more codes on each transaction being settled. If extra charges are being submitted, this field must contain value(s) as defined below.

Value Hotel Definition
0 None.
2 Restaurant.
3 Gift Shop.
4 Mini Bar.
5 Telephone.
6 Other.
7 Laundry.

For example, to indicate charges in both the gift shop and mini bar, ExtraCharges should equal "34".

This field is only applicable to Visa card transactions when IndustryType is Hotel and will not be sent for any other industry types.

FolioNumber:   The Folio or Room Agreement number assigned by the hotel.

This is a 12 alphanumeric code assigned by the hotel during the transaction.

GetTransArmorToken:   Allows you to retrieve a TransArmor Token for a specified card.

This setting allows you to retrieve a TransArmorToken for a specified card. Upon a successful call, both TransArmorToken and TransArmorProviderId will be populated with the values assigned to you by FDMS. In particular, this method is used when performing a Credit or Force using a TransArmorMode of '0' (Tokenization Only) or '1' (Encryption and Tokenization). So prior to adding the needed detail record to the FDMSSettle component, you will first retrieve a TransArmorToken by calling GetTransArmorToken for the card that you wish to use. The received TransArmorToken and TransArmorProviderId will then be set within the detail record (instead of the card data) and can be added to the FDMSSettle component.

HostTotalsPassword:   The merchant password required in Host Totals requests.

This setting specifies the merchant password required in Host Totals requests.

HostTotalsType:   Indicates the Host Totals Report type requested.

This setting specifies the type of Host Totals Report requested. Possible values are:

0 (default)Close Batch Report
1 Previous Day Report
IsCOFScheduled:   Indicates whether the stored credential transaction was scheduled.

This setting indicates whether the stored credential transaction was scheduled. This field is mandatory if the AuthIndicator config is set to "4" (Credential on File).

Possible values are:

True Scheduled
False Unscheduled
The default value is False (Unscheduled)

IsDeferredAuth:   Indicates whether the transaction is a Deferred Authorization.

This setting indicates an authorization transaction which occurs when a merchant captures transaction information while the connectivity is interrupted or unavailable. This indicator is sent in the authorization transaction once the connection is back online.

Note: This field has limited platform availability. For more information, please contact your Account Representative.

The default value is False

IsOnlineRefund:   Indicates whether a transaction is Online Refund Authorization.

Set this config to True when sending an online purchase return authorization request.

LocalTransactionDate:   The local date of the transaction.

This setting may be set to specify the local datetime of the transaction. By default the class will automatically calculate this value from the local system time. If set, this setting overrides the value calculated by the class. The format is "yyyyMMddHHmmss";

LodgingReferenceNumber:   A reference number assigned by the hotel/lodging establishment.

This is a 9 character identifier assigned by the hotel/lodging for the transaction.

MerchantCategoryCode:   The 4 digit Merchant Category Code (MCC).

This setting optionally specifies the industry standard 4 digit Merchant Category Code (MCC). This classifies the business based on the type of goods or services it provides.

MITTransactionId:   Transaction Id associated with the original authorization of a Credential on File Transaction.

This config is used when sending Merchant Initiated transactions. It should be set with the ResponseTransactionId from the original (first) Credential on File authorization. This configuration setting is required when sending a Subsequent Unscheduled Credential on File Merchant Initiated transaction, like in the example below: class.Config("StoredCredentialIndicator=S"); // S - Subsequent class.Config("IsCOFScheduled=False"); // Unscheduled class.Config("AuthIndicator=4"); // Credential on File class.Config("TransactionInitiation=1"); // Merchant initiated class.Config("MITTransactionId=" + transId); // TransactionId saved from the Response of the initial COF transaction class.AuthOnly();

MOTOIndicator:   Indicates whether the transaction is Mail Order or Telephone Order.

This setting is required for Amex transactions when POSConditionCode is set to 08. Possible values are:

1 Mail Order
2 Telephone Order
POSConditionCode:   The POS condition code.

This setting may be set to specify a different POS condition code. The class will automatically set this to an appropriate value, however this may be set to provide a specific value. Possible values are:

00 Cardholder Present, Card Present
01 Cardholder Present, Unspecified
02 Cardholder Present, Unattended Device
03 Cardholder Present, Suspect Fraud
04 Cardholder Not Present - Recurring
05 Cardholder Present, Card Not Present
06 Cardholder Present, Identity Verified
08 Cardholder Not Present, Mail Order/Telephone Order
59 Cardholder Not Present, Ecommerce
71 Cardholder Present, Magnetic Stripe Could Not Be Read
POSId:   Identifies the specific point of sale device.

This may optionally be set to identify the specific point of sale device, for instance a lane number. This may be up to 4 digits in length. This setting is only applicable when IndustryType is set to Retail.

ProgramIndicator:   Indicates the reason for the charge in a hotel transaction.

This is used to specify the program indicator for a hotel/lodging transaction. This property is not applicable for Mastercards.

Valid Values:

Value Description
1 (Default) Normal Charge (Visa, Amex)
2 Assured Reservation No Show (Visa, Amex, Discover)
3 Card Deposit (Visa, Amex)
4 Delayed Charge (Visa, Amex, Discover)
5 Express Service (Visa, Amex)
6 Assured Reservation (Visa, Amex)

RoomNumber:   The Room Number assigned by the hotel.

This is a 6 character room number code assigned by the hotel during the transaction.

RoomRate:   The daily room rate in a hotel transaction.

This field contains the daily rate for one room at the hotel/lodging property.

StoredCredentialIndicator:   Indicates the usage of stored credentials.

This configuration setting indicates the usage of stored credentials. Possible values are:

I Initial
S Subsequent

Note: This field is mandatory in a transaction where AuthIndicator value is "4" (Credential on File).

This field must be present with the value of "S" (Subsequent) when the CardInputMode config value is "10" (Credential on File).

SupportPINLessDebit:   Indicates whether the terminal can support swiped PINLess Debit transactions.

This configuration setting, when set to 'True', will send the PINLess POS Debit Flag indicator in Authorizations, Sales and Refunds in a card-present environment. The field returned in the response message indicates whether the transaction was processed as a credit or debit. Default value is 'False'.

SurchargeAmount:   Indicates Merchant Surcharge/Transaction Fee Amount charged to the customer to account for acquirer-assessed surcharge.

This configuration setting is for informational purposes only and any surcharge amounts charged to the customer should be included in the TransactionAmount.

This amount is to be presented with an implied decimal point. For example, US $10.00 must be represented as 1000, and $0.10 is likewise simply 10. The positioning of any implied decimal point is dictated by the CurrencyCode. The default currency code is for the United States.

The maximum number of digits allowed is 12 regardless of the position of the implied decimal point. This field may not contain a negative number.

TerminalCardCapability:   The terminal's card capture capability.

This setting specifies the terminal's ability to capture card information. Possible values are:

0 Terminal has no capture capability or no terminal used
1 Terminal has card capture capability
The default value is 1.

Note: If set to 0 track data must not be specified.

TerminalEntryCapability:   The terminal's entry mode capability.

This settings defines what entry modes are supported by the terminal. Possible values are:

00 Unspecified
01 Terminal not used
02 Magnetic stripe only
03 Magnetic stripe and key entry
04 Magnetic stripe, key entry, and chip
05 Bar code
06 Proximity terminal - contactless chip / RFID
07 OCR
08 Chip only
09 Chip and magnetic stripe
10 Manual entry only
11 Proximity terminal - contactless magnetic stripe
12 Hybrid - Magnetic stripe, Integrated Circuit Card Reader, and contactless capabilities
13 Terminal does not read card data
The default value is 00 (unspecified).

Note: A value of 04, 06, 08, 09, or 12 cannot be specified unless the client is certified and the device is enabled for EMV.

TerminalLocationIndicator:   The terminal's location.

This setting specifies the terminal's location. The class will automatically set this to the appropriate value depending on the IndustryType, however this may be set according to your needs to one of the following possible values:

0 On Premises; Used in a Card Present environment
1 Off Premises; Used in a Card not Present environment

Note: For MOTO and eCommerce transactions the value is set to 1 by default.

TerminalPinCapability:   The terminal's PIN capability.

This setting specifies the terminal's ability to accept PIN entry. Possible values are:

0 Unspecified
1 PIN entry capability
2 No PIN entry capability
3 PIN Pad Inoperative
4 PIN verified by terminal device
The default value is 1.
TerminalTaxCapability:   The terminal's ability to prompt for tax.

This setting specifies the terminal's ability to prompt for tax when performing a transaction with Level 2 commercial cards. Possible values are:

0 Terminal is not tax prompt capable
1 Terminal is tax prompt capable
By default this is set to -1 and will not be sent in the request.
TotalAuthorizedAmount:   Total Authorized Amount.

This setting specifies the total transaction amount that was authorized including Incremental Authorizations and Partial Reversals.

TransactionInitiation:   Indicates how the transaction was initiated.

Possible values are:

1 Transaction initiated by Merchant
2 Transaction initiated by Terminal
3 Transaction initiated by Customer

Note: This field is mandatory in a transaction where AuthIndicator value is "4" (Credential on File) or ACI value is "I" (Incremental Authorization).

TransArmorKey:   Specifies the TransArmor key used to perform the encryption.

This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the key used to perform the encryption of the Card data. When a successful call to UpdateTransArmorKey is made, this setting will be populated with your assigned key. Store this key for future use. This setting is required for any transactions that you perform using TransArmor encryption (TransArmorMode = 1).

TransArmorKeyId:   Specifies the Id of the TransArmor key used to perform the encryption.

This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the Id of the TransArmorKey used to perform the encryption of the Card data. When a successful call to UpdateTransArmorKey is made, this setting will be populated with your assigned key ID. Store this key Id for future use. This setting is required for any transactions that you perform using TransArmor encryption (TransArmorMode = 1).

TransArmorMode:   Specifies the TransArmor Security Level to use.

This setting allows you to specify the type of TransArmor security to be used when authorizing and settling transactions. The available modes are:

0 (default) TransArmor security is not used.
1 TransArmor Encryption and Tokenization. The Card data will be encrypted using the specified TransArmorKey in the initial authorization. All subsequent requests (including settlement) will use the returned TransArmorToken. The type of encryption used is RSA and is currently the only supported encryption type.
2 TransArmor Tokenization only. The Card data will not be encrypted. A TransArmorToken will be returned for the transaction and will be used in all subsequent requests (including settlement).

Note: Your merchant account must be configured to use TransArmor. The configuration is 'Mode' specific and thus you must inform FDMS which type of TransArmor Security Level you wish to use.

TransArmorProviderId:   The Id of the Provider that issued a TransArmorToken.

This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the Provider Id returned in an authorization response when using TransArmor (TransArmorMode = 1 OR 2). When an authorization is performed using TransArmor, a Provider Id will be returned in the response along with a TransArmorToken. This Provider Id will be used in all subsequent requests (such as reversals and settlement) and must be specified along with TransArmorToken.

TransArmorToken:   A TransArmor Token used in place of a card number or magnetic stripe data.

This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the Token returned in an authorization response when using TransArmor (TransArmorMode = 1 OR 2). When an authorization is performed using TransArmor, a Token will be returned in the response. This Token will be used in all subsequent requests (such as reversals and settlement) in place of the CardNumber or CardMagneticStripe.

TransArmorTokenType:   The FDMS assigned token type.

This setting must be set to 4 digit the FDMS assigned token type. This is required when requesting a token. Specifies the type of TransArmor token that will be used.

This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the type of TransArmor token used.

TransArmorTokenType:   The FDMS assigned token type.

This setting must be set to 4 digit the FDMS assigned token type. This is required when requesting a token. Specifies the type of TransArmor token that will be used.

This setting allows you to retrieve and specify the type of TransArmor token used.

TransArmorUpdateIndicator:   Indicates whether your TransArmorKey needs to be updated.

This setting allows you to identify whether your TransArmorKey needs to be updated. When performing an authorization using TransArmor, it is possible that FDMS will request that you update your TransArmorKey. This setting should be queried after every authorization is performed. If the returned value is "False", no key update is required. If "True" is returned, you should update your key by calling UpdateTransArmorKey after the completion of the function in progress (i.e. authorization). If the key update request was successful, you should update your TransArmorKey and TransArmorKeyId values. If the key update request fails, you can continue using your same TransArmorKey and TransArmorKeyId values until another key update indicator is received.

UpdateTransArmorKey:   Allows you to update your TransArmor Key.

This setting allows you to retrieve a TransArmorKey that will be used to perform TransArmor encryption (TransArmorMode = 1). When this is set to "true" the class will perform the request immediately. Upon a successful call, both TransArmorKey and TransArmorKeyId will be populated with the values assigned to you by FDMS.

UTCTransactionDate:   The UTC date of the transaction.

This setting may be set to specify the UTC datetime of the transaction. By default the class will automatically calculate this value from the local system time. If set, this setting overrides the value calculated by the class. The format is "yyyyMMddHHmmss";

VisaCheckoutIndicator:   Indicates whether the transaction is a Visa Checkout transaction.

This configuration setting, when set to 'True' indicates that the transaction is a Visa Checkout transaction. Default value is 'False'.

VoiceApprovalCode:   The voice approval.

This setting specifies the voice approval code obtained when authenticating the transaction over the phone with the issuer. Set this before calling Capture.

HTTP Config Settings

AcceptEncoding:   Used to tell the server which types of content encodings the client supports.

When AllowHTTPCompression is True, the class adds an Accept-Encoding header to the request being sent to the server. By default, this header's value is "gzip, deflate". This configuration setting allows you to change the value of the Accept-Encoding header. Note: The class only supports gzip and deflate decompression algorithms.

AllowHTTPCompression:   This property enables HTTP compression for receiving data.

This configuration setting enables HTTP compression for receiving data. When set to True (default), the class will accept compressed data. It then will uncompress the data it has received. The class will handle data compressed by both gzip and deflate compression algorithms.

When True, the class adds an Accept-Encoding header to the outgoing request. The value for this header can be controlled by the AcceptEncoding configuration setting. The default value for this header is "gzip, deflate".

The default value is True.

AllowHTTPFallback:   Whether HTTP/2 connections are permitted to fallback to HTTP/1.1.

This configuration setting controls whether HTTP/2 connections are permitted to fall back to HTTP/1.1 when the server does not support HTTP/2. This setting is applicable only when HTTPVersion is set to "2.0".

If set to True (default), the class will automatically use HTTP/1.1 if the server does not support HTTP/2. If set to False, the class fails with an error if the server does not support HTTP/2.

The default value is True.

Append:   Whether to append data to LocalFile.

This configuration setting determines whether data will be appended when writing to LocalFile. When set to True, downloaded data will be appended to LocalFile. This may be used in conjunction with Range to resume a failed download. This is applicable only when LocalFile is set. The default value is False.

Authorization:   The Authorization string to be sent to the server.

If the Authorization property contains a nonempty string, an Authorization HTTP request header is added to the request. This header conveys Authorization information to the server.

This property is provided so that the HTTP class can be extended with other security schemes in addition to the authorization schemes already implemented by the class.

The AuthScheme property defines the authentication scheme used. In the case of HTTP Basic Authentication (default), every time User and Password are set, they are Base64 encoded, and the result is put in the Authorization property in the form "Basic [encoded-user-password]".

BytesTransferred:   Contains the number of bytes transferred in the response data.

This configuration setting returns the raw number of bytes from the HTTP response data, before the component processes the data, whether it is chunked or compressed. This returns the same value as the Transfer event, by BytesTransferred.

ChunkSize:   Specifies the chunk size in bytes when using chunked encoding.

This is applicable only when UseChunkedEncoding is True. This setting specifies the chunk size in bytes to be used when posting data. The default value is 16384.

CompressHTTPRequest:   Set to true to compress the body of a PUT or POST request.

If set to True, the body of a PUT or POST request will be compressed into gzip format before sending the request. The "Content-Encoding" header is also added to the outgoing request.

The default value is False.

EncodeURL:   If set to True the URL will be encoded by the class.

If set to True, the URL passed to the class will be URL encoded. The default value is False.

FollowRedirects:   Determines what happens when the server issues a redirect.

This option determines what happens when the server issues a redirect. Normally, the class returns an error if the server responds with an "Object Moved" message. If this property is set to 1 (always), the new URL for the object is retrieved automatically every time.

If this property is set to 2 (Same Scheme), the new URL is retrieved automatically only if the URL Scheme is the same; otherwise, the class fails with an error.

Note: Following the HTTP specification, unless this option is set to 1 (Always), automatic redirects will be performed only for GET or HEAD requests. Other methods potentially could change the conditions of the initial request and create security vulnerabilities.

Furthermore, if either the new URL server or port are different from the existing one, User and Password are also reset to empty, unless this property is set to 1 (Always), in which case the same credentials are used to connect to the new server.

A Redirect event is fired for every URL the product is redirected to. In the case of automatic redirections, the Redirect event is a good place to set properties related to the new connection (e.g., new authentication parameters).

The default value is 0 (Never). In this case, redirects are never followed, and the class fails with an error instead.

Following are the valid options:

  • 0 - Never
  • 1 - Always
  • 2 - Same Scheme

GetOn302Redirect:   If set to True the class will perform a GET on the new location.

The default value is False. If set to True, the class will perform a GET on the new location. Otherwise, it will use the same HTTP method again.

HTTP2HeadersWithoutIndexing:   HTTP2 headers that should not update the dynamic header table with incremental indexing.

HTTP/2 servers maintain a dynamic table of headers and values seen over the course of a connection. Typically, these headers are inserted into the table through incremental indexing (also known as HPACK, defined in RFC 7541). To tell the component not to use incremental indexing for certain headers, and thus not update the dynamic table, set this configuration option to a comma-delimited list of the header names.

HTTPVersion:   The version of HTTP used by the class.

This property specifies the HTTP version used by the class. Possible values are as follows:

  • "1.0"
  • "1.1" (default)
  • "2.0"
  • "3.0"

When using HTTP/2 ("2.0"), additional restrictions apply. Please see the following notes for details.

HTTP/2 Notes

When using HTTP/2, a secure Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security (TLS/SSL) connection is required. Attempting to use a plaintext URL with HTTP/2 will result in an error.

If the server does not support HTTP/2, the class will automatically use HTTP/1.1 instead. This is done to provide compatibility without the need for any additional settings. To see which version was used, check NegotiatedHTTPVersion after calling a method. The AllowHTTPFallback setting controls whether this behavior is allowed (default) or disallowed.

HTTP/3 Notes

HTTP/3 is supported only in .NET and Java.

When using HTTP/3, a secure (TLS/SSL) connection is required. Attempting to use a plaintext URL with HTTP/3 will result in an error.

IfModifiedSince:   A date determining the maximum age of the desired document.

If this setting contains a nonempty string, an If-Modified-Since HTTP header is added to the request. The value of this header is used to make the HTTP request conditional: if the requested documented has not been modified since the time specified in the field, a copy of the document will not be returned from the server; instead, a 304 (not modified) response will be returned by the server and the component throws an exception

The format of the date value for IfModifiedSince is detailed in the HTTP specs. For example: Sat, 29 Oct 2017 19:43:31 GMT.

KeepAlive:   Determines whether the HTTP connection is closed after completion of the request.

If true, the component will not send the Connection: Close header. The absence of the Connection header indicates to the server that HTTP persistent connections should be used if supported. Note: Not all servers support persistent connections. If false, the connection will be closed immediately after the server response is received.

The default value for KeepAlive is false.

KerberosSPN:   The Service Principal Name for the Kerberos Domain Controller.

If the Service Principal Name on the Kerberos Domain Controller is not the same as the URL that you are authenticating to, the Service Principal Name should be set here.

LogLevel:   The level of detail that is logged.

This configuration setting controls the level of detail that is logged through the Log event. Possible values are as follows:

0 (None) No events are logged.
1 (Info - default) Informational events are logged.
2 (Verbose) Detailed data are logged.
3 (Debug) Debug data are logged.

The value 1 (Info) logs basic information, including the URL, HTTP version, and status details.

The value 2 (Verbose) logs additional information about the request and response.

The value 3 (Debug) logs the headers and body for both the request and response, as well as additional debug information (if any).

MaxRedirectAttempts:   Limits the number of redirects that are followed in a request.

When FollowRedirects is set to any value other than frNever, the class will follow redirects until this maximum number of redirect attempts are made. The default value is 20.

NegotiatedHTTPVersion:   The negotiated HTTP version.

This configuration setting may be queried after the request is complete to indicate the HTTP version used. When HTTPVersion is set to "2.0" (if the server does not support "2.0"), then the class will fall back to using "1.1" automatically. This setting will indicate which version was used.

OtherHeaders:   Other headers as determined by the user (optional).

This configuration setting can be set to a string of headers to be appended to the HTTP request headers.

The headers must follow the format "header: value" as described in the HTTP specifications. Header lines should be separated by CRLF ("\r\n") .

Use this configuration setting with caution. If this configuration setting contains invalid headers, HTTP requests may fail.

This configuration setting is useful for extending the functionality of the class beyond what is provided.

ProxyAuthorization:   The authorization string to be sent to the proxy server.

This is similar to the Authorization configuration setting, but is used for proxy authorization. If this configuration setting contains a nonempty string, a Proxy-Authorization HTTP request header is added to the request. This header conveys proxy Authorization information to the server. If ProxyUser and ProxyPassword are specified, this value is calculated using the algorithm specified by ProxyAuthScheme.

ProxyAuthScheme:   The authorization scheme to be used for the proxy.

This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Proxy properties.

ProxyPassword:   A password if authentication is to be used for the proxy.

This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Proxy properties.

ProxyPort:   Port for the proxy server (default 80).

This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Proxy properties.

ProxyServer:   Name or IP address of a proxy server (optional).

This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Proxy properties.

ProxyUser:   A user name if authentication is to be used for the proxy.

This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Proxy properties.

SentHeaders:   The full set of headers as sent by the client.

This configuration setting returns the complete set of raw headers as sent by the client.

StatusCode:   The status code of the last response from the server.

This configuration setting contains the result code of the last response from the server.

StatusLine:   The first line of the last response from the server.

This setting contains the first line of the last response from the server. The format of the line will be [HTTP version] [Result Code] [Description].

TransferredData:   The contents of the last response from the server.

This configuration setting contains the contents of the last response from the server.

TransferredDataLimit:   The maximum number of incoming bytes to be stored by the class.

If TransferredDataLimit is set to 0 (default), no limits are imposed. Otherwise, this reflects the maximum number of incoming bytes that can be stored by the class.

TransferredHeaders:   The full set of headers as received from the server.

This configuration setting returns the complete set of raw headers as received from the server.

TransferredRequest:   The full request as sent by the client.

This configuration setting returns the full request as sent by the client. For performance reasons, the request is not normally saved. Set this configuration setting to ON before making a request to enable it. Following are examples of this request:

.NET Http http = new Http(); http.Config("TransferredRequest=on"); http.PostData = "body"; http.Post("http://someserver.com"); Console.WriteLine(http.Config("TransferredRequest")); C++ HTTP http; http.Config("TransferredRequest=on"); http.SetPostData("body", 5); http.Post("http://someserver.com"); printf("%s\r\n", http.Config("TransferredRequest"));

UseChunkedEncoding:   Enables or Disables HTTP chunked encoding for transfers.

If UseChunkedEncoding is set to True, the class will use HTTP-chunked encoding when posting, if possible. HTTP-chunked encoding allows large files to be sent in chunks instead of all at once. If set to False, the class will not use HTTP-chunked encoding. The default value is False.

Note: Some servers (such as the ASP.NET Development Server) may not support chunked encoding.

UseIDNs:   Whether to encode hostnames to internationalized domain names.

This configuration setting specifies whether hostnames containing non-ASCII characters are encoded to internationalized domain names. When set to True, if a hostname contains non-ASCII characters, it is encoded using Punycode to an IDN (internationalized domain name).

The default value is False and the hostname will always be used exactly as specified. Note: The CodePage setting must be set to a value capable of interpreting the specified host name. For instance, to specify UTF-8, set CodePage to 65001. In the C++ Edition for Windows, the *W version of the class must be used. For instance, DNSW or HTTPW.

UsePlatformHTTPClient:   Whether or not to use the platform HTTP client.

When using this configuration setting, if True, the component will use the default HTTP client for the platform (URLConnection in Java, WebRequest in .NET, or CFHTTPMessage in Mac/iOS) instead of the internal HTTP implementation. This is important for environments in which direct access to sockets is limited or not allowed (e.g., in the Google AppEngine).

Note: This setting is applicable only to Mac/iOS editions.

UseProxyAutoConfigURL:   Whether to use a Proxy auto-config file when attempting a connection.

This configuration specifies whether the class will attempt to use the Proxy auto-config URL when establishing a connection and ProxyAutoDetect is set to True.

When True (default), the class will check for the existence of a Proxy auto-config URL, and if found, will determine the appropriate proxy to use.

UserAgent:   Information about the user agent (browser).

This is the value supplied in the HTTP User-Agent header. The default setting is "IPWorks HTTP Component - www.nsoftware.com".

Override the default with the name and version of your software.

TCPClient Config Settings

ConnectionTimeout:   Sets a separate timeout value for establishing a connection.

When set, this configuration setting allows you to specify a different timeout value for establishing a connection. Otherwise, the class will use Timeout for establishing a connection and transmitting/receiving data. Sets a separate timeout value for establishing a connection.

When set, this configuration setting allows you to specify a different timeout value for establishing a connection. Otherwise, the class will use Timeout for establishing a connection and transmitting/receiving data.

ConnectionTimeout:   Sets a separate timeout value for establishing a connection.

When set, this configuration setting allows you to specify a different timeout value for establishing a connection. Otherwise, the class will use Timeout for establishing a connection and transmitting/receiving data. Sets a separate timeout value for establishing a connection.

When set, this configuration setting allows you to specify a different timeout value for establishing a connection. Otherwise, the class will use Timeout for establishing a connection and transmitting/receiving data.

FirewallAutoDetect:   Tells the class whether or not to automatically detect and use firewall system settings, if available.

This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties. Tells the class whether or not to automatically detect and use firewall system settings, if available.

This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

FirewallAutoDetect:   Tells the class whether or not to automatically detect and use firewall system settings, if available.

This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties. Tells the class whether or not to automatically detect and use firewall system settings, if available.

This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

FirewallHost:   Name or IP address of firewall (optional).

If a FirewallHost is given, requested connections will be authenticated through the specified firewall when connecting.

If the FirewallHost setting is set to a Domain Name, a DNS request is initiated. Upon successful termination of the request, the FirewallHost setting is set to the corresponding address. If the search is not successful, an error is returned.

Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

Name or IP address of firewall (optional).

If a FirewallHost is given, requested connections will be authenticated through the specified firewall when connecting.

If the FirewallHost setting is set to a Domain Name, a DNS request is initiated. Upon successful termination of the request, the FirewallHost setting is set to the corresponding address. If the search is not successful, an error is returned.

Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

FirewallHost:   Name or IP address of firewall (optional).

If a FirewallHost is given, requested connections will be authenticated through the specified firewall when connecting.

If the FirewallHost setting is set to a Domain Name, a DNS request is initiated. Upon successful termination of the request, the FirewallHost setting is set to the corresponding address. If the search is not successful, an error is returned.

Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

Name or IP address of firewall (optional).

If a FirewallHost is given, requested connections will be authenticated through the specified firewall when connecting.

If the FirewallHost setting is set to a Domain Name, a DNS request is initiated. Upon successful termination of the request, the FirewallHost setting is set to the corresponding address. If the search is not successful, an error is returned.

Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

FirewallPassword:   Password to be used if authentication is to be used when connecting through the firewall.

If FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the given firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.

Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

Password to be used if authentication is to be used when connecting through the firewall.

If FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the given firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.

Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

FirewallPassword:   Password to be used if authentication is to be used when connecting through the firewall.

If FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the given firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.

Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

Password to be used if authentication is to be used when connecting through the firewall.

If FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the given firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.

Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

FirewallPort:   The TCP port for the FirewallHost;.

The FirewallPort is set automatically when FirewallType is set to a valid value.

Note: This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

The TCP port for the FirewallHost;.

The FirewallPort is set automatically when FirewallType is set to a valid value.

Note: This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

FirewallPort:   The TCP port for the FirewallHost;.

The FirewallPort is set automatically when FirewallType is set to a valid value.

Note: This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

The TCP port for the FirewallHost;.

The FirewallPort is set automatically when FirewallType is set to a valid value.

Note: This configuration setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

FirewallType:   Determines the type of firewall to connect through.

The appropriate values are as follows:

0No firewall (default setting).
1Connect through a tunneling proxy. FirewallPort is set to 80.
2Connect through a SOCKS4 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080.
3Connect through a SOCKS5 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080.
10Connect through a SOCKS4A Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080.

Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

Determines the type of firewall to connect through.

The appropriate values are as follows:

0No firewall (default setting).
1Connect through a tunneling proxy. FirewallPort is set to 80.
2Connect through a SOCKS4 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080.
3Connect through a SOCKS5 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080.
10Connect through a SOCKS4A Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080.

Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

FirewallType:   Determines the type of firewall to connect through.

The appropriate values are as follows:

0No firewall (default setting).
1Connect through a tunneling proxy. FirewallPort is set to 80.
2Connect through a SOCKS4 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080.
3Connect through a SOCKS5 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080.
10Connect through a SOCKS4A Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080.

Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

Determines the type of firewall to connect through.

The appropriate values are as follows:

0No firewall (default setting).
1Connect through a tunneling proxy. FirewallPort is set to 80.
2Connect through a SOCKS4 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080.
3Connect through a SOCKS5 Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080.
10Connect through a SOCKS4A Proxy. FirewallPort is set to 1080.

Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

FirewallUser:   A user name if authentication is to be used connecting through a firewall.

If the FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the Firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.

Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

A user name if authentication is to be used connecting through a firewall.

If the FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the Firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.

Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

FirewallUser:   A user name if authentication is to be used connecting through a firewall.

If the FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the Firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.

Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

A user name if authentication is to be used connecting through a firewall.

If the FirewallHost is specified, the FirewallUser and FirewallPassword settings are used to connect and authenticate to the Firewall. If the authentication fails, the class fails with an error.

Note: This setting is provided for use by classs that do not directly expose Firewall properties.

KeepAliveInterval:   The retry interval, in milliseconds, to be used when a TCP keep-alive packet is sent and no response is received.

When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the interval at which the successive keep-alive packets are sent in milliseconds. This system default if this value is not specified here is 1 second.

Note: This value is not applicable in macOS.

The retry interval, in milliseconds, to be used when a TCP keep-alive packet is sent and no response is received.

When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the interval at which the successive keep-alive packets are sent in milliseconds. This system default if this value is not specified here is 1 second.

Note: This value is not applicable in macOS.

KeepAliveInterval:   The retry interval, in milliseconds, to be used when a TCP keep-alive packet is sent and no response is received.

When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the interval at which the successive keep-alive packets are sent in milliseconds. This system default if this value is not specified here is 1 second.

Note: This value is not applicable in macOS.

The retry interval, in milliseconds, to be used when a TCP keep-alive packet is sent and no response is received.

When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the interval at which the successive keep-alive packets are sent in milliseconds. This system default if this value is not specified here is 1 second.

Note: This value is not applicable in macOS.

KeepAliveRetryCount:   The number of keep-alive packets to be sent before the remotehost is considered disconnected.

When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the number of times that the keep-alive packets will be sent before the remote host is considered disconnected. The system default if this value is not specified here is 9.

Note: This configuration setting is only available in the Unix platform. It is not supported in masOS or FreeBSD.

The number of keep-alive packets to be sent before the remotehost is considered disconnected.

When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the number of times that the keep-alive packets will be sent before the remote host is considered disconnected. The system default if this value is not specified here is 9.

Note: This configuration setting is only available in the Unix platform. It is not supported in masOS or FreeBSD.

KeepAliveRetryCount:   The number of keep-alive packets to be sent before the remotehost is considered disconnected.

When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the number of times that the keep-alive packets will be sent before the remote host is considered disconnected. The system default if this value is not specified here is 9.

Note: This configuration setting is only available in the Unix platform. It is not supported in masOS or FreeBSD.

The number of keep-alive packets to be sent before the remotehost is considered disconnected.

When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. A TCP keep-alive packet will be sent after a period of inactivity as defined by KeepAliveTime. If no acknowledgment is received from the remote host, the keep-alive packet will be sent again. This configuration setting specifies the number of times that the keep-alive packets will be sent before the remote host is considered disconnected. The system default if this value is not specified here is 9.

Note: This configuration setting is only available in the Unix platform. It is not supported in masOS or FreeBSD.

KeepAliveTime:   The inactivity time in milliseconds before a TCP keep-alive packet is sent.

When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. By default, the operating system will determine the time a connection is idle before a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) keep-alive packet is sent. This system default if this value is not specified here is 2 hours. In many cases, a shorter interval is more useful. Set this value to the desired interval in milliseconds.

The inactivity time in milliseconds before a TCP keep-alive packet is sent.

When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. By default, the operating system will determine the time a connection is idle before a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) keep-alive packet is sent. This system default if this value is not specified here is 2 hours. In many cases, a shorter interval is more useful. Set this value to the desired interval in milliseconds.

KeepAliveTime:   The inactivity time in milliseconds before a TCP keep-alive packet is sent.

When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. By default, the operating system will determine the time a connection is idle before a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) keep-alive packet is sent. This system default if this value is not specified here is 2 hours. In many cases, a shorter interval is more useful. Set this value to the desired interval in milliseconds.

The inactivity time in milliseconds before a TCP keep-alive packet is sent.

When set, TCPKeepAlive will automatically be set to True. By default, the operating system will determine the time a connection is idle before a Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) keep-alive packet is sent. This system default if this value is not specified here is 2 hours. In many cases, a shorter interval is more useful. Set this value to the desired interval in milliseconds.

Linger:   When set to True, connections are terminated gracefully.

This property controls how a connection is closed. The default is True.

In the case that Linger is True (default), two scenarios determine how long the connection will linger. In the first, if LingerTime is 0 (default), the system will attempt to send pending data for a connection until the default IP timeout expires.

In the second scenario, if LingerTime is a positive value, the system will attempt to send pending data until the specified LingerTime is reached. If this attempt fails, then the system will reset the connection.

The default behavior (which is also the default mode for stream sockets) might result in a long delay in closing the connection. Although the class returns control immediately, the system could hold system resources until all pending data are sent (even after your application closes).

Setting this property to False forces an immediate disconnection. If you know that the other side has received all the data you sent (e.g., by a client acknowledgment), setting this property to False might be the appropriate course of action.

When set to True, connections are terminated gracefully.

This property controls how a connection is closed. The default is True.

In the case that Linger is True (default), two scenarios determine how long the connection will linger. In the first, if LingerTime is 0 (default), the system will attempt to send pending data for a connection until the default IP timeout expires.

In the second scenario, if LingerTime is a positive value, the system will attempt to send pending data until the specified LingerTime is reached. If this attempt fails, then the system will reset the connection.

The default behavior (which is also the default mode for stream sockets) might result in a long delay in closing the connection. Although the class returns control immediately, the system could hold system resources until all pending data are sent (even after your application closes).

Setting this property to False forces an immediate disconnection. If you know that the other side has received all the data you sent (e.g., by a client acknowledgment), setting this property to False might be the appropriate course of action.

Linger:   When set to True, connections are terminated gracefully.

This property controls how a connection is closed. The default is True.

In the case that Linger is True (default), two scenarios determine how long the connection will linger. In the first, if LingerTime is 0 (default), the system will attempt to send pending data for a connection until the default IP timeout expires.

In the second scenario, if LingerTime is a positive value, the system will attempt to send pending data until the specified LingerTime is reached. If this attempt fails, then the system will reset the connection.

The default behavior (which is also the default mode for stream sockets) might result in a long delay in closing the connection. Although the class returns control immediately, the system could hold system resources until all pending data are sent (even after your application closes).

Setting this property to False forces an immediate disconnection. If you know that the other side has received all the data you sent (e.g., by a client acknowledgment), setting this property to False might be the appropriate course of action.

When set to True, connections are terminated gracefully.

This property controls how a connection is closed. The default is True.

In the case that Linger is True (default), two scenarios determine how long the connection will linger. In the first, if LingerTime is 0 (default), the system will attempt to send pending data for a connection until the default IP timeout expires.

In the second scenario, if LingerTime is a positive value, the system will attempt to send pending data until the specified LingerTime is reached. If this attempt fails, then the system will reset the connection.

The default behavior (which is also the default mode for stream sockets) might result in a long delay in closing the connection. Although the class returns control immediately, the system could hold system resources until all pending data are sent (even after your application closes).

Setting this property to False forces an immediate disconnection. If you know that the other side has received all the data you sent (e.g., by a client acknowledgment), setting this property to False might be the appropriate course of action.

LingerTime:   Time in seconds to have the connection linger.

LingerTime is the time, in seconds, the socket connection will linger. This value is 0 by default, which means it will use the default IP timeout. Time in seconds to have the connection linger.

LingerTime is the time, in seconds, the socket connection will linger. This value is 0 by default, which means it will use the default IP timeout.

LingerTime:   Time in seconds to have the connection linger.

LingerTime is the time, in seconds, the socket connection will linger. This value is 0 by default, which means it will use the default IP timeout. Time in seconds to have the connection linger.

LingerTime is the time, in seconds, the socket connection will linger. This value is 0 by default, which means it will use the default IP timeout.

LocalHost:   The name of the local host through which connections are initiated or accepted.

The LocalHost setting contains the name of the local host as obtained by the gethostname() system call, or if the user has assigned an IP address, the value of that address.

In multi-homed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface) setting LocalHost to the value of an interface will make the class initiate connections (or accept in the case of server classs) only through that interface.

If the class is connected, the LocalHost setting shows the IP address of the interface through which the connection is made in internet dotted format (aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd). In most cases, this is the address of the local host, except for multi-homed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface).

The name of the local host through which connections are initiated or accepted.

The LocalHost setting contains the name of the local host as obtained by the gethostname() system call, or if the user has assigned an IP address, the value of that address.

In multi-homed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface) setting LocalHost to the value of an interface will make the class initiate connections (or accept in the case of server classs) only through that interface.

If the class is connected, the LocalHost setting shows the IP address of the interface through which the connection is made in internet dotted format (aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd). In most cases, this is the address of the local host, except for multi-homed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface).

LocalHost:   The name of the local host through which connections are initiated or accepted.

The LocalHost setting contains the name of the local host as obtained by the gethostname() system call, or if the user has assigned an IP address, the value of that address.

In multi-homed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface) setting LocalHost to the value of an interface will make the class initiate connections (or accept in the case of server classs) only through that interface.

If the class is connected, the LocalHost setting shows the IP address of the interface through which the connection is made in internet dotted format (aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd). In most cases, this is the address of the local host, except for multi-homed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface).

The name of the local host through which connections are initiated or accepted.

The LocalHost setting contains the name of the local host as obtained by the gethostname() system call, or if the user has assigned an IP address, the value of that address.

In multi-homed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface) setting LocalHost to the value of an interface will make the class initiate connections (or accept in the case of server classs) only through that interface.

If the class is connected, the LocalHost setting shows the IP address of the interface through which the connection is made in internet dotted format (aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd). In most cases, this is the address of the local host, except for multi-homed hosts (machines with more than one IP interface).

LocalPort:   The port in the local host where the class binds.

This must be set before a connection is attempted. It instructs the class to bind to a specific port (or communication endpoint) in the local machine.

Setting this to 0 (default) enables the system to choose a port at random. The chosen port will be shown by LocalPort after the connection is established.

LocalPort cannot be changed once a connection is made. Any attempt to set this when a connection is active will generate an error.

This; setting is useful when trying to connect to services that require a trusted port in the client side. An example is the remote shell (rsh) service in UNIX systems.

The port in the local host where the class binds.

This must be set before a connection is attempted. It instructs the class to bind to a specific port (or communication endpoint) in the local machine.

Setting this to 0 (default) enables the system to choose a port at random. The chosen port will be shown by LocalPort after the connection is established.

LocalPort cannot be changed once a connection is made. Any attempt to set this when a connection is active will generate an error.

This; setting is useful when trying to connect to services that require a trusted port in the client side. An example is the remote shell (rsh) service in UNIX systems.

LocalPort:   The port in the local host where the class binds.

This must be set before a connection is attempted. It instructs the class to bind to a specific port (or communication endpoint) in the local machine.

Setting this to 0 (default) enables the system to choose a port at random. The chosen port will be shown by LocalPort after the connection is established.

LocalPort cannot be changed once a connection is made. Any attempt to set this when a connection is active will generate an error.

This; setting is useful when trying to connect to services that require a trusted port in the client side. An example is the remote shell (rsh) service in UNIX systems.

The port in the local host where the class binds.

This must be set before a connection is attempted. It instructs the class to bind to a specific port (or communication endpoint) in the local machine.

Setting this to 0 (default) enables the system to choose a port at random. The chosen port will be shown by LocalPort after the connection is established.

LocalPort cannot be changed once a connection is made. Any attempt to set this when a connection is active will generate an error.

This; setting is useful when trying to connect to services that require a trusted port in the client side. An example is the remote shell (rsh) service in UNIX systems.

MaxLineLength:   The maximum amount of data to accumulate when no EOL is found.

MaxLineLength is the size of an internal buffer, which holds received data while waiting for an EOL string.

If an EOL string is found in the input stream before MaxLineLength bytes are received, the DataIn event is fired with the EOL parameter set to True, and the buffer is reset.

If no EOL is found, and MaxLineLength bytes are accumulated in the buffer, the DataIn event is fired with the EOL parameter set to False, and the buffer is reset.

The minimum value for MaxLineLength is 256 bytes. The default value is 2048 bytes.

The maximum amount of data to accumulate when no EOL is found.

MaxLineLength is the size of an internal buffer, which holds received data while waiting for an EOL string.

If an EOL string is found in the input stream before MaxLineLength bytes are received, the DataIn event is fired with the EOL parameter set to True, and the buffer is reset.

If no EOL is found, and MaxLineLength bytes are accumulated in the buffer, the DataIn event is fired with the EOL parameter set to False, and the buffer is reset.

The minimum value for MaxLineLength is 256 bytes. The default value is 2048 bytes.

MaxLineLength:   The maximum amount of data to accumulate when no EOL is found.

MaxLineLength is the size of an internal buffer, which holds received data while waiting for an EOL string.

If an EOL string is found in the input stream before MaxLineLength bytes are received, the DataIn event is fired with the EOL parameter set to True, and the buffer is reset.

If no EOL is found, and MaxLineLength bytes are accumulated in the buffer, the DataIn event is fired with the EOL parameter set to False, and the buffer is reset.

The minimum value for MaxLineLength is 256 bytes. The default value is 2048 bytes.

The maximum amount of data to accumulate when no EOL is found.

MaxLineLength is the size of an internal buffer, which holds received data while waiting for an EOL string.

If an EOL string is found in the input stream before MaxLineLength bytes are received, the DataIn event is fired with the EOL parameter set to True, and the buffer is reset.

If no EOL is found, and MaxLineLength bytes are accumulated in the buffer, the DataIn event is fired with the EOL parameter set to False, and the buffer is reset.

The minimum value for MaxLineLength is 256 bytes. The default value is 2048 bytes.

MaxTransferRate:   The transfer rate limit in bytes per second.

This configuration setting can be used to throttle outbound TCP traffic. Set this to the number of bytes to be sent per second. By default, this is not set and there is no limit. The transfer rate limit in bytes per second.

This configuration setting can be used to throttle outbound TCP traffic. Set this to the number of bytes to be sent per second. By default, this is not set and there is no limit.

MaxTransferRate:   The transfer rate limit in bytes per second.

This configuration setting can be used to throttle outbound TCP traffic. Set this to the number of bytes to be sent per second. By default, this is not set and there is no limit. The transfer rate limit in bytes per second.

This configuration setting can be used to throttle outbound TCP traffic. Set this to the number of bytes to be sent per second. By default, this is not set and there is no limit.

ProxyExceptionsList:   A semicolon separated list of hosts and IPs to bypass when using a proxy.

This configuration setting optionally specifies a semicolon-separated list of hostnames or IP addresses to bypass when a proxy is in use. When requests are made to hosts specified in this property, the proxy will not be used. For instance:

www.google.com;www.nsoftware.com

A semicolon separated list of hosts and IPs to bypass when using a proxy.

This configuration setting optionally specifies a semicolon-separated list of hostnames or IP addresses to bypass when a proxy is in use. When requests are made to hosts specified in this property, the proxy will not be used. For instance:

www.google.com;www.nsoftware.com

ProxyExceptionsList:   A semicolon separated list of hosts and IPs to bypass when using a proxy.

This configuration setting optionally specifies a semicolon-separated list of hostnames or IP addresses to bypass when a proxy is in use. When requests are made to hosts specified in this property, the proxy will not be used. For instance:

www.google.com;www.nsoftware.com

A semicolon separated list of hosts and IPs to bypass when using a proxy.

This configuration setting optionally specifies a semicolon-separated list of hostnames or IP addresses to bypass when a proxy is in use. When requests are made to hosts specified in this property, the proxy will not be used. For instance:

www.google.com;www.nsoftware.com

TCPKeepAlive:   Determines whether or not the keep alive socket option is enabled.

If set to True, the socket's keep-alive option is enabled and keep-alive packets will be sent periodically to maintain the connection. Set KeepAliveTime and KeepAliveInterval to configure the timing of the keep-alive packets.

Note: This value is not applicable in Java.

Determines whether or not the keep alive socket option is enabled.

If set to True, the socket's keep-alive option is enabled and keep-alive packets will be sent periodically to maintain the connection. Set KeepAliveTime and KeepAliveInterval to configure the timing of the keep-alive packets.

Note: This value is not applicable in Java.

TCPKeepAlive:   Determines whether or not the keep alive socket option is enabled.

If set to True, the socket's keep-alive option is enabled and keep-alive packets will be sent periodically to maintain the connection. Set KeepAliveTime and KeepAliveInterval to configure the timing of the keep-alive packets.

Note: This value is not applicable in Java.

Determines whether or not the keep alive socket option is enabled.

If set to True, the socket's keep-alive option is enabled and keep-alive packets will be sent periodically to maintain the connection. Set KeepAliveTime and KeepAliveInterval to configure the timing of the keep-alive packets.

Note: This value is not applicable in Java.

TcpNoDelay:   Whether or not to delay when sending packets.

When true, the socket will send all data that is ready to send at once. When false, the socket will send smaller buffered packets of data at small intervals. This is known as the Nagle algorithm.

By default, this config is set to false.

Whether or not to delay when sending packets.

When true, the socket will send all data that is ready to send at once. When false, the socket will send smaller buffered packets of data at small intervals. This is known as the Nagle algorithm.

By default, this config is set to false.

TcpNoDelay:   Whether or not to delay when sending packets.

When true, the socket will send all data that is ready to send at once. When false, the socket will send smaller buffered packets of data at small intervals. This is known as the Nagle algorithm.

By default, this config is set to false.

Whether or not to delay when sending packets.

When true, the socket will send all data that is ready to send at once. When false, the socket will send smaller buffered packets of data at small intervals. This is known as the Nagle algorithm.

By default, this config is set to false.

UseIPv6:   Whether to use IPv6.

When set to 0 (default), the class will use IPv4 exclusively. When set to 1, the class will use IPv6 exclusively. To instruct the class to prefer IPv6 addresses, but use IPv4 if IPv6 is not supported on the system, this setting should be set to 2. The default value is 0. Possible values are:

0 IPv4 Only
1 IPv6 Only
2 IPv6 with IPv4 fallback
Whether to use IPv6.

When set to 0 (default), the class will use IPv4 exclusively. When set to 1, the class will use IPv6 exclusively. To instruct the class to prefer IPv6 addresses, but use IPv4 if IPv6 is not supported on the system, this setting should be set to 2. The default value is 0. Possible values are:

0 IPv4 Only
1 IPv6 Only
2 IPv6 with IPv4 fallback
UseIPv6:   Whether to use IPv6.

When set to 0 (default), the class will use IPv4 exclusively. When set to 1, the class will use IPv6 exclusively. To instruct the class to prefer IPv6 addresses, but use IPv4 if IPv6 is not supported on the system, this setting should be set to 2. The default value is 0. Possible values are:

0 IPv4 Only
1 IPv6 Only
2 IPv6 with IPv4 fallback
Whether to use IPv6.

When set to 0 (default), the class will use IPv4 exclusively. When set to 1, the class will use IPv6 exclusively. To instruct the class to prefer IPv6 addresses, but use IPv4 if IPv6 is not supported on the system, this setting should be set to 2. The default value is 0. Possible values are:

0 IPv4 Only
1 IPv6 Only
2 IPv6 with IPv4 fallback

SSL Config Settings

LogSSLPackets:   Controls whether SSL packets are logged when using the internal security API.

When SSLProvider is set to Internal, this setting controls whether SSL packets should be logged. By default, this setting is False, as it is only useful for debugging purposes.

When enabled, SSL packet logs are output using the SSLStatus event, which will fire each time an SSL packet is sent or received.

Enabling this setting has no effect if SSLProvider is set to Platform.

Controls whether SSL packets are logged when using the internal security API.

When SSLProvider is set to Internal, this setting controls whether SSL packets should be logged. By default, this setting is False, as it is only useful for debugging purposes.

When enabled, SSL packet logs are output using the SSLStatus event, which will fire each time an SSL packet is sent or received.

Enabling this setting has no effect if SSLProvider is set to Platform.

LogSSLPackets:   Controls whether SSL packets are logged when using the internal security API.

When SSLProvider is set to Internal, this setting controls whether SSL packets should be logged. By default, this setting is False, as it is only useful for debugging purposes.

When enabled, SSL packet logs are output using the SSLStatus event, which will fire each time an SSL packet is sent or received.

Enabling this setting has no effect if SSLProvider is set to Platform.

Controls whether SSL packets are logged when using the internal security API.

When SSLProvider is set to Internal, this setting controls whether SSL packets should be logged. By default, this setting is False, as it is only useful for debugging purposes.

When enabled, SSL packet logs are output using the SSLStatus event, which will fire each time an SSL packet is sent or received.

Enabling this setting has no effect if SSLProvider is set to Platform.

OpenSSLCADir:   The path to a directory containing CA certificates.

This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.

The path set by this property should point to a directory containing CA certificates in PEM format. The files each contain one CA certificate. The files are looked up by the CA subject name hash value, which must hence be available. If more than one CA certificate with the same name hash value exist, the extension must be different (e.g. 9d66eef0.0, 9d66eef0.1 etc). OpenSSL recommends to use the c_rehash utility to create the necessary links. Please refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.

The path to a directory containing CA certificates.

This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.

The path set by this property should point to a directory containing CA certificates in PEM format. The files each contain one CA certificate. The files are looked up by the CA subject name hash value, which must hence be available. If more than one CA certificate with the same name hash value exist, the extension must be different (e.g. 9d66eef0.0, 9d66eef0.1 etc). OpenSSL recommends to use the c_rehash utility to create the necessary links. Please refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.

OpenSSLCADir:   The path to a directory containing CA certificates.

This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.

The path set by this property should point to a directory containing CA certificates in PEM format. The files each contain one CA certificate. The files are looked up by the CA subject name hash value, which must hence be available. If more than one CA certificate with the same name hash value exist, the extension must be different (e.g. 9d66eef0.0, 9d66eef0.1 etc). OpenSSL recommends to use the c_rehash utility to create the necessary links. Please refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.

The path to a directory containing CA certificates.

This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.

The path set by this property should point to a directory containing CA certificates in PEM format. The files each contain one CA certificate. The files are looked up by the CA subject name hash value, which must hence be available. If more than one CA certificate with the same name hash value exist, the extension must be different (e.g. 9d66eef0.0, 9d66eef0.1 etc). OpenSSL recommends to use the c_rehash utility to create the necessary links. Please refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.

OpenSSLCAFile:   Name of the file containing the list of CA's trusted by your application.

This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.

The file set by this property should contain a list of CA certificates in PEM format. The file can contain several CA certificates identified by

-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----

... (CA certificate in base64 encoding) ...

-----END CERTIFICATE-----

sequences. Before, between, and after the certificates text is allowed which can be used e.g. for descriptions of the certificates. Please refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.

Name of the file containing the list of CA's trusted by your application.

This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.

The file set by this property should contain a list of CA certificates in PEM format. The file can contain several CA certificates identified by

-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----

... (CA certificate in base64 encoding) ...

-----END CERTIFICATE-----

sequences. Before, between, and after the certificates text is allowed which can be used e.g. for descriptions of the certificates. Please refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.

OpenSSLCAFile:   Name of the file containing the list of CA's trusted by your application.

This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.

The file set by this property should contain a list of CA certificates in PEM format. The file can contain several CA certificates identified by

-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----

... (CA certificate in base64 encoding) ...

-----END CERTIFICATE-----

sequences. Before, between, and after the certificates text is allowed which can be used e.g. for descriptions of the certificates. Please refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.

Name of the file containing the list of CA's trusted by your application.

This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.

The file set by this property should contain a list of CA certificates in PEM format. The file can contain several CA certificates identified by

-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----

... (CA certificate in base64 encoding) ...

-----END CERTIFICATE-----

sequences. Before, between, and after the certificates text is allowed which can be used e.g. for descriptions of the certificates. Please refer to the OpenSSL man page SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3) for details.

OpenSSLCipherList:   A string that controls the ciphers to be used by SSL.

This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.

The format of this string is described in the OpenSSL man page ciphers(1) section "CIPHER LIST FORMAT". Please refer to it for details. The default string "DEFAULT" is determined at compile time and is normally equivalent to "ALL:!ADH:RC4+RSA:+SSLv2:@STRENGTH".

A string that controls the ciphers to be used by SSL.

This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.

The format of this string is described in the OpenSSL man page ciphers(1) section "CIPHER LIST FORMAT". Please refer to it for details. The default string "DEFAULT" is determined at compile time and is normally equivalent to "ALL:!ADH:RC4+RSA:+SSLv2:@STRENGTH".

OpenSSLCipherList:   A string that controls the ciphers to be used by SSL.

This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.

The format of this string is described in the OpenSSL man page ciphers(1) section "CIPHER LIST FORMAT". Please refer to it for details. The default string "DEFAULT" is determined at compile time and is normally equivalent to "ALL:!ADH:RC4+RSA:+SSLv2:@STRENGTH".

A string that controls the ciphers to be used by SSL.

This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.

The format of this string is described in the OpenSSL man page ciphers(1) section "CIPHER LIST FORMAT". Please refer to it for details. The default string "DEFAULT" is determined at compile time and is normally equivalent to "ALL:!ADH:RC4+RSA:+SSLv2:@STRENGTH".

OpenSSLPrngSeedData:   The data to seed the pseudo random number generator (PRNG).

This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.

By default OpenSSL uses the device file "/dev/urandom" to seed the PRNG and setting OpenSSLPrngSeedData is not required. If set, the string specified is used to seed the PRNG.

The data to seed the pseudo random number generator (PRNG).

This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.

By default OpenSSL uses the device file "/dev/urandom" to seed the PRNG and setting OpenSSLPrngSeedData is not required. If set, the string specified is used to seed the PRNG.

OpenSSLPrngSeedData:   The data to seed the pseudo random number generator (PRNG).

This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.

By default OpenSSL uses the device file "/dev/urandom" to seed the PRNG and setting OpenSSLPrngSeedData is not required. If set, the string specified is used to seed the PRNG.

The data to seed the pseudo random number generator (PRNG).

This functionality is available only when the provider is OpenSSL.

By default OpenSSL uses the device file "/dev/urandom" to seed the PRNG and setting OpenSSLPrngSeedData is not required. If set, the string specified is used to seed the PRNG.

ReuseSSLSession:   Determines if the SSL session is reused.

If set to true, the class will reuse the context if and only if the following criteria are met:

  • The target host name is the same.
  • The system cache entry has not expired (default timeout is 10 hours).
  • The application process that calls the function is the same.
  • The logon session is the same.
  • The instance of the class is the same.

Determines if the SSL session is reused.

If set to true, the class will reuse the context if and only if the following criteria are met:

  • The target host name is the same.
  • The system cache entry has not expired (default timeout is 10 hours).
  • The application process that calls the function is the same.
  • The logon session is the same.
  • The instance of the class is the same.

ReuseSSLSession:   Determines if the SSL session is reused.

If set to true, the class will reuse the context if and only if the following criteria are met:

  • The target host name is the same.
  • The system cache entry has not expired (default timeout is 10 hours).
  • The application process that calls the function is the same.
  • The logon session is the same.
  • The instance of the class is the same.

Determines if the SSL session is reused.

If set to true, the class will reuse the context if and only if the following criteria are met:

  • The target host name is the same.
  • The system cache entry has not expired (default timeout is 10 hours).
  • The application process that calls the function is the same.
  • The logon session is the same.
  • The instance of the class is the same.

SSLCACertFilePaths:   The paths to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.

This setting specifies the paths on disk to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.

The value is formatted as a list of paths separated by semicolons. The class will check for the existence of each file in the order specified. When a file is found the CA certificates within the file will be loaded and used to determine the validity of server or client certificates.

The default value is:

/etc/ssl/ca-bundle.pem;/etc/pki/tls/certs/ca-bundle.crt;/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt;/etc/pki/tls/cacert.pem

The paths to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.

This setting specifies the paths on disk to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.

The value is formatted as a list of paths separated by semicolons. The class will check for the existence of each file in the order specified. When a file is found the CA certificates within the file will be loaded and used to determine the validity of server or client certificates.

The default value is:

/etc/ssl/ca-bundle.pem;/etc/pki/tls/certs/ca-bundle.crt;/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt;/etc/pki/tls/cacert.pem

SSLCACertFilePaths:   The paths to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.

This setting specifies the paths on disk to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.

The value is formatted as a list of paths separated by semicolons. The class will check for the existence of each file in the order specified. When a file is found the CA certificates within the file will be loaded and used to determine the validity of server or client certificates.

The default value is:

/etc/ssl/ca-bundle.pem;/etc/pki/tls/certs/ca-bundle.crt;/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt;/etc/pki/tls/cacert.pem

The paths to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.

This setting specifies the paths on disk to CA certificate files on Unix/Linux.

The value is formatted as a list of paths separated by semicolons. The class will check for the existence of each file in the order specified. When a file is found the CA certificates within the file will be loaded and used to determine the validity of server or client certificates.

The default value is:

/etc/ssl/ca-bundle.pem;/etc/pki/tls/certs/ca-bundle.crt;/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt;/etc/pki/tls/cacert.pem

SSLCACerts:   A newline separated list of CA certificate to use during SSL client authentication.

This setting specifies one or more CA certificates to be included in the request when performing SSL client authentication. Some servers require the entire chain, including CA certificates, to be presented when performing SSL client authentication. The value of this setting is a newline (CrLf) separated list of certificates. For instance:

-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw
...
eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w
F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
\r \n
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp
..
d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

A newline separated list of CA certificate to use during SSL client authentication.

This setting specifies one or more CA certificates to be included in the request when performing SSL client authentication. Some servers require the entire chain, including CA certificates, to be presented when performing SSL client authentication. The value of this setting is a newline (CrLf) separated list of certificates. For instance:

-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw
...
eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w
F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
\r \n
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp
..
d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

SSLCACerts:   A newline separated list of CA certificate to use during SSL client authentication.

This setting specifies one or more CA certificates to be included in the request when performing SSL client authentication. Some servers require the entire chain, including CA certificates, to be presented when performing SSL client authentication. The value of this setting is a newline (CrLf) separated list of certificates. For instance:

-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw
...
eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w
F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
\r \n
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp
..
d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

A newline separated list of CA certificate to use during SSL client authentication.

This setting specifies one or more CA certificates to be included in the request when performing SSL client authentication. Some servers require the entire chain, including CA certificates, to be presented when performing SSL client authentication. The value of this setting is a newline (CrLf) separated list of certificates. For instance:

-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw
...
eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w
F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
\r \n
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp
..
d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

SSLCipherStrength:   The minimum cipher strength used for bulk encryption.

This minimum cipher strength largely dependent on the security modules installed on the system. If the cipher strength specified is not supported, an error will be returned when connections are initiated.

Please note that this setting contains the minimum cipher strength requested from the security library. The actual cipher strength used for the connection is shown by the SSLStatus event.

Use this setting with caution. Requesting a lower cipher strength than necessary could potentially cause serious security vulnerabilities in your application.

When the provider is OpenSSL, SSLCipherStrength is currently not supported. This functionality is instead made available through the OpenSSLCipherList config setting.

The minimum cipher strength used for bulk encryption.

This minimum cipher strength largely dependent on the security modules installed on the system. If the cipher strength specified is not supported, an error will be returned when connections are initiated.

Please note that this setting contains the minimum cipher strength requested from the security library. The actual cipher strength used for the connection is shown by the SSLStatus event.

Use this setting with caution. Requesting a lower cipher strength than necessary could potentially cause serious security vulnerabilities in your application.

When the provider is OpenSSL, SSLCipherStrength is currently not supported. This functionality is instead made available through the OpenSSLCipherList config setting.

SSLCipherStrength:   The minimum cipher strength used for bulk encryption.

This minimum cipher strength largely dependent on the security modules installed on the system. If the cipher strength specified is not supported, an error will be returned when connections are initiated.

Please note that this setting contains the minimum cipher strength requested from the security library. The actual cipher strength used for the connection is shown by the SSLStatus event.

Use this setting with caution. Requesting a lower cipher strength than necessary could potentially cause serious security vulnerabilities in your application.

When the provider is OpenSSL, SSLCipherStrength is currently not supported. This functionality is instead made available through the OpenSSLCipherList config setting.

The minimum cipher strength used for bulk encryption.

This minimum cipher strength largely dependent on the security modules installed on the system. If the cipher strength specified is not supported, an error will be returned when connections are initiated.

Please note that this setting contains the minimum cipher strength requested from the security library. The actual cipher strength used for the connection is shown by the SSLStatus event.

Use this setting with caution. Requesting a lower cipher strength than necessary could potentially cause serious security vulnerabilities in your application.

When the provider is OpenSSL, SSLCipherStrength is currently not supported. This functionality is instead made available through the OpenSSLCipherList config setting.

SSLEnabledCipherSuites:   The cipher suite to be used in an SSL negotiation.

The enabled cipher suites to be used in SSL negotiation.

By default, the enabled cipher suites will include all available ciphers ("*").

The special value "*" means that the class will pick all of the supported cipher suites. If SSLEnabledCipherSuites is set to any other value, only the specified cipher suites will be considered.

Multiple cipher suites are separated by semicolons.

Example values when SSLProvider is set to Platform: obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*"); obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256"); obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256;CALG_3DES"); Possible values when SSLProvider is set to Platform include:

  • CALG_3DES
  • CALG_3DES_112
  • CALG_AES
  • CALG_AES_128
  • CALG_AES_192
  • CALG_AES_256
  • CALG_AGREEDKEY_ANY
  • CALG_CYLINK_MEK
  • CALG_DES
  • CALG_DESX
  • CALG_DH_EPHEM
  • CALG_DH_SF
  • CALG_DSS_SIGN
  • CALG_ECDH
  • CALG_ECDH_EPHEM
  • CALG_ECDSA
  • CALG_ECMQV
  • CALG_HASH_REPLACE_OWF
  • CALG_HUGHES_MD5
  • CALG_HMAC
  • CALG_KEA_KEYX
  • CALG_MAC
  • CALG_MD2
  • CALG_MD4
  • CALG_MD5
  • CALG_NO_SIGN
  • CALG_OID_INFO_CNG_ONLY
  • CALG_OID_INFO_PARAMETERS
  • CALG_PCT1_MASTER
  • CALG_RC2
  • CALG_RC4
  • CALG_RC5
  • CALG_RSA_KEYX
  • CALG_RSA_SIGN
  • CALG_SCHANNEL_ENC_KEY
  • CALG_SCHANNEL_MAC_KEY
  • CALG_SCHANNEL_MASTER_HASH
  • CALG_SEAL
  • CALG_SHA
  • CALG_SHA1
  • CALG_SHA_256
  • CALG_SHA_384
  • CALG_SHA_512
  • CALG_SKIPJACK
  • CALG_SSL2_MASTER
  • CALG_SSL3_MASTER
  • CALG_SSL3_SHAMD5
  • CALG_TEK
  • CALG_TLS1_MASTER
  • CALG_TLS1PRF
Example values when SSLProvider is set to Internal: obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*"); obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA"); obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA;TLS_DH_ANON_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA"); Possible values when SSLProvider is set to Internal include:
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 (Not Recommended)
  • TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 (Not Recommended)
  • TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 (Not Recommended)
  • TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 (Not Recommended)
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA

When TLS 1.3 is negotiated (see SSLEnabledProtocols) only the following cipher suites are supported:

  • TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
  • TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256

SSLEnabledCipherSuites is used together with SSLCipherStrength.

The cipher suite to be used in an SSL negotiation.

The enabled cipher suites to be used in SSL negotiation.

By default, the enabled cipher suites will include all available ciphers ("*").

The special value "*" means that the class will pick all of the supported cipher suites. If SSLEnabledCipherSuites is set to any other value, only the specified cipher suites will be considered.

Multiple cipher suites are separated by semicolons.

Example values when SSLProvider is set to Platform: obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*"); obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256"); obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256;CALG_3DES"); Possible values when SSLProvider is set to Platform include:

  • CALG_3DES
  • CALG_3DES_112
  • CALG_AES
  • CALG_AES_128
  • CALG_AES_192
  • CALG_AES_256
  • CALG_AGREEDKEY_ANY
  • CALG_CYLINK_MEK
  • CALG_DES
  • CALG_DESX
  • CALG_DH_EPHEM
  • CALG_DH_SF
  • CALG_DSS_SIGN
  • CALG_ECDH
  • CALG_ECDH_EPHEM
  • CALG_ECDSA
  • CALG_ECMQV
  • CALG_HASH_REPLACE_OWF
  • CALG_HUGHES_MD5
  • CALG_HMAC
  • CALG_KEA_KEYX
  • CALG_MAC
  • CALG_MD2
  • CALG_MD4
  • CALG_MD5
  • CALG_NO_SIGN
  • CALG_OID_INFO_CNG_ONLY
  • CALG_OID_INFO_PARAMETERS
  • CALG_PCT1_MASTER
  • CALG_RC2
  • CALG_RC4
  • CALG_RC5
  • CALG_RSA_KEYX
  • CALG_RSA_SIGN
  • CALG_SCHANNEL_ENC_KEY
  • CALG_SCHANNEL_MAC_KEY
  • CALG_SCHANNEL_MASTER_HASH
  • CALG_SEAL
  • CALG_SHA
  • CALG_SHA1
  • CALG_SHA_256
  • CALG_SHA_384
  • CALG_SHA_512
  • CALG_SKIPJACK
  • CALG_SSL2_MASTER
  • CALG_SSL3_MASTER
  • CALG_SSL3_SHAMD5
  • CALG_TEK
  • CALG_TLS1_MASTER
  • CALG_TLS1PRF
Example values when SSLProvider is set to Internal: obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*"); obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA"); obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA;TLS_DH_ANON_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA"); Possible values when SSLProvider is set to Internal include:
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 (Not Recommended)
  • TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 (Not Recommended)
  • TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 (Not Recommended)
  • TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 (Not Recommended)
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA

When TLS 1.3 is negotiated (see SSLEnabledProtocols) only the following cipher suites are supported:

  • TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
  • TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256

SSLEnabledCipherSuites is used together with SSLCipherStrength.

SSLEnabledCipherSuites:   The cipher suite to be used in an SSL negotiation.

The enabled cipher suites to be used in SSL negotiation.

By default, the enabled cipher suites will include all available ciphers ("*").

The special value "*" means that the class will pick all of the supported cipher suites. If SSLEnabledCipherSuites is set to any other value, only the specified cipher suites will be considered.

Multiple cipher suites are separated by semicolons.

Example values when SSLProvider is set to Platform: obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*"); obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256"); obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256;CALG_3DES"); Possible values when SSLProvider is set to Platform include:

  • CALG_3DES
  • CALG_3DES_112
  • CALG_AES
  • CALG_AES_128
  • CALG_AES_192
  • CALG_AES_256
  • CALG_AGREEDKEY_ANY
  • CALG_CYLINK_MEK
  • CALG_DES
  • CALG_DESX
  • CALG_DH_EPHEM
  • CALG_DH_SF
  • CALG_DSS_SIGN
  • CALG_ECDH
  • CALG_ECDH_EPHEM
  • CALG_ECDSA
  • CALG_ECMQV
  • CALG_HASH_REPLACE_OWF
  • CALG_HUGHES_MD5
  • CALG_HMAC
  • CALG_KEA_KEYX
  • CALG_MAC
  • CALG_MD2
  • CALG_MD4
  • CALG_MD5
  • CALG_NO_SIGN
  • CALG_OID_INFO_CNG_ONLY
  • CALG_OID_INFO_PARAMETERS
  • CALG_PCT1_MASTER
  • CALG_RC2
  • CALG_RC4
  • CALG_RC5
  • CALG_RSA_KEYX
  • CALG_RSA_SIGN
  • CALG_SCHANNEL_ENC_KEY
  • CALG_SCHANNEL_MAC_KEY
  • CALG_SCHANNEL_MASTER_HASH
  • CALG_SEAL
  • CALG_SHA
  • CALG_SHA1
  • CALG_SHA_256
  • CALG_SHA_384
  • CALG_SHA_512
  • CALG_SKIPJACK
  • CALG_SSL2_MASTER
  • CALG_SSL3_MASTER
  • CALG_SSL3_SHAMD5
  • CALG_TEK
  • CALG_TLS1_MASTER
  • CALG_TLS1PRF
Example values when SSLProvider is set to Internal: obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*"); obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA"); obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA;TLS_DH_ANON_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA"); Possible values when SSLProvider is set to Internal include:
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 (Not Recommended)
  • TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 (Not Recommended)
  • TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 (Not Recommended)
  • TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 (Not Recommended)
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA

When TLS 1.3 is negotiated (see SSLEnabledProtocols) only the following cipher suites are supported:

  • TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
  • TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256

SSLEnabledCipherSuites is used together with SSLCipherStrength.

The cipher suite to be used in an SSL negotiation.

The enabled cipher suites to be used in SSL negotiation.

By default, the enabled cipher suites will include all available ciphers ("*").

The special value "*" means that the class will pick all of the supported cipher suites. If SSLEnabledCipherSuites is set to any other value, only the specified cipher suites will be considered.

Multiple cipher suites are separated by semicolons.

Example values when SSLProvider is set to Platform: obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*"); obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256"); obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=CALG_AES_256;CALG_3DES"); Possible values when SSLProvider is set to Platform include:

  • CALG_3DES
  • CALG_3DES_112
  • CALG_AES
  • CALG_AES_128
  • CALG_AES_192
  • CALG_AES_256
  • CALG_AGREEDKEY_ANY
  • CALG_CYLINK_MEK
  • CALG_DES
  • CALG_DESX
  • CALG_DH_EPHEM
  • CALG_DH_SF
  • CALG_DSS_SIGN
  • CALG_ECDH
  • CALG_ECDH_EPHEM
  • CALG_ECDSA
  • CALG_ECMQV
  • CALG_HASH_REPLACE_OWF
  • CALG_HUGHES_MD5
  • CALG_HMAC
  • CALG_KEA_KEYX
  • CALG_MAC
  • CALG_MD2
  • CALG_MD4
  • CALG_MD5
  • CALG_NO_SIGN
  • CALG_OID_INFO_CNG_ONLY
  • CALG_OID_INFO_PARAMETERS
  • CALG_PCT1_MASTER
  • CALG_RC2
  • CALG_RC4
  • CALG_RC5
  • CALG_RSA_KEYX
  • CALG_RSA_SIGN
  • CALG_SCHANNEL_ENC_KEY
  • CALG_SCHANNEL_MAC_KEY
  • CALG_SCHANNEL_MASTER_HASH
  • CALG_SEAL
  • CALG_SHA
  • CALG_SHA1
  • CALG_SHA_256
  • CALG_SHA_384
  • CALG_SHA_512
  • CALG_SKIPJACK
  • CALG_SSL2_MASTER
  • CALG_SSL3_MASTER
  • CALG_SSL3_SHAMD5
  • CALG_TEK
  • CALG_TLS1_MASTER
  • CALG_TLS1PRF
Example values when SSLProvider is set to Internal: obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=*"); obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA"); obj.config("SSLEnabledCipherSuites=TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA;TLS_DH_ANON_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA"); Possible values when SSLProvider is set to Internal include:
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256
  • TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 (Not Recommended)
  • TLS_DH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 (Not Recommended)
  • TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_128_GCM_SHA256 (Not Recommended)
  • TLS_DH_DSS_WITH_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 (Not Recommended)
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA384
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_ECDSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_ECDH_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_DES_CBC_SHA
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
  • TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA

When TLS 1.3 is negotiated (see SSLEnabledProtocols) only the following cipher suites are supported:

  • TLS_AES_256_GCM_SHA384
  • TLS_CHACHA20_POLY1305_SHA256
  • TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256

SSLEnabledCipherSuites is used together with SSLCipherStrength.

SSLEnabledProtocols:   Used to enable/disable the supported security protocols.

Used to enable/disable the supported security protocols.

Not all supported protocols are enabled by default (the value of this setting is 4032). If you want more granular control over the enabled protocols, you can set this property to the binary 'OR' of one or more of the following values:

TLS1.312288 (Hex 3000)
TLS1.23072 (Hex C00) (Default)
TLS1.1768 (Hex 300) (Default)
TLS1 192 (Hex C0) (Default)
SSL3 48 (Hex 30) [Platform Only]
SSL2 12 (Hex 0C) [Platform Only]

SSLEnabledProtocols - TLS 1.3 Notes

By default when TLS 1.3 is enabled the class will use the internal TLS implementation when the SSLProvider is set to Automatic for all editions.

In editions which are designed to run on Windows SSLProvider can be set to Platform to use the platform implementation instead of the internal implementation. When configured in this manner, please note that the platform provider is only supported on Windows 11 / Windows Server 2022 and up. The default internal provider is available on all platforms and is not restricted to any specific OS version.

If set to 1 (Platform provider) please be aware of the following notes:

  • The platform provider is only available on Windows 11 / Windows Server 2022 and up.
  • SSLEnabledCipherSuites and other similar SSL configuration settings are not supported.
  • If SSLEnabledProtocols includes both TLS 1.3 and TLS 1.2 the above restrictions are still applicable even if TLS 1.2 is negotiated. Enabling TLS 1.3 with the platform provider changes the implementation used for all TLS versions.

SSLEnabledProtocols: SSL2 and SSL3 Notes:

SSL 2.0 and 3.0 are not supported by the class when the SSLProvider is set to internal. To use SSL 2.0 or SSL 3.0, the platform security API must have the protocols enabled and SSLProvider needs to be set to platform.

Used to enable/disable the supported security protocols.

Used to enable/disable the supported security protocols.

Not all supported protocols are enabled by default (the value of this setting is 4032). If you want more granular control over the enabled protocols, you can set this property to the binary 'OR' of one or more of the following values:

TLS1.312288 (Hex 3000)
TLS1.23072 (Hex C00) (Default)
TLS1.1768 (Hex 300) (Default)
TLS1 192 (Hex C0) (Default)
SSL3 48 (Hex 30) [Platform Only]
SSL2 12 (Hex 0C) [Platform Only]

SSLEnabledProtocols - TLS 1.3 Notes

By default when TLS 1.3 is enabled the class will use the internal TLS implementation when the SSLProvider is set to Automatic for all editions.

In editions which are designed to run on Windows SSLProvider can be set to Platform to use the platform implementation instead of the internal implementation. When configured in this manner, please note that the platform provider is only supported on Windows 11 / Windows Server 2022 and up. The default internal provider is available on all platforms and is not restricted to any specific OS version.

If set to 1 (Platform provider) please be aware of the following notes:

  • The platform provider is only available on Windows 11 / Windows Server 2022 and up.
  • SSLEnabledCipherSuites and other similar SSL configuration settings are not supported.
  • If SSLEnabledProtocols includes both TLS 1.3 and TLS 1.2 the above restrictions are still applicable even if TLS 1.2 is negotiated. Enabling TLS 1.3 with the platform provider changes the implementation used for all TLS versions.

SSLEnabledProtocols: SSL2 and SSL3 Notes:

SSL 2.0 and 3.0 are not supported by the class when the SSLProvider is set to internal. To use SSL 2.0 or SSL 3.0, the platform security API must have the protocols enabled and SSLProvider needs to be set to platform.

SSLEnabledProtocols:   Used to enable/disable the supported security protocols.

Used to enable/disable the supported security protocols.

Not all supported protocols are enabled by default (the value of this setting is 4032). If you want more granular control over the enabled protocols, you can set this property to the binary 'OR' of one or more of the following values:

TLS1.312288 (Hex 3000)
TLS1.23072 (Hex C00) (Default)
TLS1.1768 (Hex 300) (Default)
TLS1 192 (Hex C0) (Default)
SSL3 48 (Hex 30) [Platform Only]
SSL2 12 (Hex 0C) [Platform Only]

SSLEnabledProtocols - TLS 1.3 Notes

By default when TLS 1.3 is enabled the class will use the internal TLS implementation when the SSLProvider is set to Automatic for all editions.

In editions which are designed to run on Windows SSLProvider can be set to Platform to use the platform implementation instead of the internal implementation. When configured in this manner, please note that the platform provider is only supported on Windows 11 / Windows Server 2022 and up. The default internal provider is available on all platforms and is not restricted to any specific OS version.

If set to 1 (Platform provider) please be aware of the following notes:

  • The platform provider is only available on Windows 11 / Windows Server 2022 and up.
  • SSLEnabledCipherSuites and other similar SSL configuration settings are not supported.
  • If SSLEnabledProtocols includes both TLS 1.3 and TLS 1.2 the above restrictions are still applicable even if TLS 1.2 is negotiated. Enabling TLS 1.3 with the platform provider changes the implementation used for all TLS versions.

SSLEnabledProtocols: SSL2 and SSL3 Notes:

SSL 2.0 and 3.0 are not supported by the class when the SSLProvider is set to internal. To use SSL 2.0 or SSL 3.0, the platform security API must have the protocols enabled and SSLProvider needs to be set to platform.

Used to enable/disable the supported security protocols.

Used to enable/disable the supported security protocols.

Not all supported protocols are enabled by default (the value of this setting is 4032). If you want more granular control over the enabled protocols, you can set this property to the binary 'OR' of one or more of the following values:

TLS1.312288 (Hex 3000)
TLS1.23072 (Hex C00) (Default)
TLS1.1768 (Hex 300) (Default)
TLS1 192 (Hex C0) (Default)
SSL3 48 (Hex 30) [Platform Only]
SSL2 12 (Hex 0C) [Platform Only]

SSLEnabledProtocols - TLS 1.3 Notes

By default when TLS 1.3 is enabled the class will use the internal TLS implementation when the SSLProvider is set to Automatic for all editions.

In editions which are designed to run on Windows SSLProvider can be set to Platform to use the platform implementation instead of the internal implementation. When configured in this manner, please note that the platform provider is only supported on Windows 11 / Windows Server 2022 and up. The default internal provider is available on all platforms and is not restricted to any specific OS version.

If set to 1 (Platform provider) please be aware of the following notes:

  • The platform provider is only available on Windows 11 / Windows Server 2022 and up.
  • SSLEnabledCipherSuites and other similar SSL configuration settings are not supported.
  • If SSLEnabledProtocols includes both TLS 1.3 and TLS 1.2 the above restrictions are still applicable even if TLS 1.2 is negotiated. Enabling TLS 1.3 with the platform provider changes the implementation used for all TLS versions.

SSLEnabledProtocols: SSL2 and SSL3 Notes:

SSL 2.0 and 3.0 are not supported by the class when the SSLProvider is set to internal. To use SSL 2.0 or SSL 3.0, the platform security API must have the protocols enabled and SSLProvider needs to be set to platform.

SSLEnableRenegotiation:   Whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension is supported.

This setting specifies whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension will be used in the request when using the internal security API. This setting is true by default, but can be set to false to disable the extension.

This setting is only applicable when SSLProvider is set to Internal.

Whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension is supported.

This setting specifies whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension will be used in the request when using the internal security API. This setting is true by default, but can be set to false to disable the extension.

This setting is only applicable when SSLProvider is set to Internal.

SSLEnableRenegotiation:   Whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension is supported.

This setting specifies whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension will be used in the request when using the internal security API. This setting is true by default, but can be set to false to disable the extension.

This setting is only applicable when SSLProvider is set to Internal.

Whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension is supported.

This setting specifies whether the renegotiation_info SSL extension will be used in the request when using the internal security API. This setting is true by default, but can be set to false to disable the extension.

This setting is only applicable when SSLProvider is set to Internal.

SSLIncludeCertChain:   Whether the entire certificate chain is included in the SSLServerAuthentication event.

This setting specifies whether the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event contains the full certificate chain. By default this value is False and only the leaf certificate will be present in the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event.

If set to True all certificates returned by the server will be present in the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event. This includes the leaf certificate, any intermediate certificate, and the root certificate.

Whether the entire certificate chain is included in the SSLServerAuthentication event.

This setting specifies whether the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event contains the full certificate chain. By default this value is False and only the leaf certificate will be present in the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event.

If set to True all certificates returned by the server will be present in the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event. This includes the leaf certificate, any intermediate certificate, and the root certificate.

SSLIncludeCertChain:   Whether the entire certificate chain is included in the SSLServerAuthentication event.

This setting specifies whether the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event contains the full certificate chain. By default this value is False and only the leaf certificate will be present in the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event.

If set to True all certificates returned by the server will be present in the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event. This includes the leaf certificate, any intermediate certificate, and the root certificate.

Whether the entire certificate chain is included in the SSLServerAuthentication event.

This setting specifies whether the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event contains the full certificate chain. By default this value is False and only the leaf certificate will be present in the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event.

If set to True all certificates returned by the server will be present in the Encoded parameter of the SSLServerAuthentication event. This includes the leaf certificate, any intermediate certificate, and the root certificate.

SSLKeyLogFile:   The location of a file where per-session secrets are written for debugging purposes.

This setting optionally specifies the full path to a file on disk where per-session secrets are stored for debugging purposes.

When set, the class will save the session secrets in the same format as the SSLKEYLOGFILE environment variable functionality used by most major browsers and tools such as Chrome, Firefox, and cURL. This file can then be used in tools such as Wireshark to decrypt TLS traffice for debugging purposes. When writing to this file the class will only append, it will not overwrite previous values.

Note: This setting is only applicable when SSLProvider is set to Internal.

The location of a file where per-session secrets are written for debugging purposes.

This setting optionally specifies the full path to a file on disk where per-session secrets are stored for debugging purposes.

When set, the class will save the session secrets in the same format as the SSLKEYLOGFILE environment variable functionality used by most major browsers and tools such as Chrome, Firefox, and cURL. This file can then be used in tools such as Wireshark to decrypt TLS traffice for debugging purposes. When writing to this file the class will only append, it will not overwrite previous values.

Note: This setting is only applicable when SSLProvider is set to Internal.

SSLKeyLogFile:   The location of a file where per-session secrets are written for debugging purposes.

This setting optionally specifies the full path to a file on disk where per-session secrets are stored for debugging purposes.

When set, the class will save the session secrets in the same format as the SSLKEYLOGFILE environment variable functionality used by most major browsers and tools such as Chrome, Firefox, and cURL. This file can then be used in tools such as Wireshark to decrypt TLS traffice for debugging purposes. When writing to this file the class will only append, it will not overwrite previous values.

Note: This setting is only applicable when SSLProvider is set to Internal.

The location of a file where per-session secrets are written for debugging purposes.

This setting optionally specifies the full path to a file on disk where per-session secrets are stored for debugging purposes.

When set, the class will save the session secrets in the same format as the SSLKEYLOGFILE environment variable functionality used by most major browsers and tools such as Chrome, Firefox, and cURL. This file can then be used in tools such as Wireshark to decrypt TLS traffice for debugging purposes. When writing to this file the class will only append, it will not overwrite previous values.

Note: This setting is only applicable when SSLProvider is set to Internal.

SSLNegotiatedCipher:   Returns the negotiated cipher suite.

Returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipher[connId]");

Returns the negotiated cipher suite.

Returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipher[connId]");

SSLNegotiatedCipher:   Returns the negotiated cipher suite.

Returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipher[connId]");

Returns the negotiated cipher suite.

Returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipher[connId]");

SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength:   Returns the negotiated cipher suite strength.

Returns the strength of the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g.TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength[connId]");

Returns the negotiated cipher suite strength.

Returns the strength of the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g.TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength[connId]");

SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength:   Returns the negotiated cipher suite strength.

Returns the strength of the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g.TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength[connId]");

Returns the negotiated cipher suite strength.

Returns the strength of the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g.TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherStrength[connId]");

SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite:   Returns the negotiated cipher suite.

Returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake represented as a single string.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite[connId]");

Returns the negotiated cipher suite.

Returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake represented as a single string.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite[connId]");

SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite:   Returns the negotiated cipher suite.

Returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake represented as a single string.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite[connId]");

Returns the negotiated cipher suite.

Returns the cipher suite negotiated during the SSL handshake represented as a single string.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedCipherSuite[connId]");

SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange:   Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm.

Returns the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange[connId]");

Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm.

Returns the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange[connId]");

SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange:   Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm.

Returns the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange[connId]");

Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm.

Returns the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchange[connId]");

SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength:   Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm strength.

Returns the strenghth of the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength[connId]");

Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm strength.

Returns the strenghth of the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength[connId]");

SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength:   Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm strength.

Returns the strenghth of the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength[connId]");

Returns the negotiated key exchange algorithm strength.

Returns the strenghth of the key exchange algorithm negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedKeyExchangeStrength[connId]");

SSLNegotiatedVersion:   Returns the negotiated protocol version.

Returns the protocol version negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedVersion[connId]");

Returns the negotiated protocol version.

Returns the protocol version negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedVersion[connId]");

SSLNegotiatedVersion:   Returns the negotiated protocol version.

Returns the protocol version negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedVersion[connId]");

Returns the negotiated protocol version.

Returns the protocol version negotiated during the SSL handshake.

Note: For server components (e.g. TCPServer) this is a per-connection setting accessed by passing the ConnectionId. For example: server.Config("SSLNegotiatedVersion[connId]");

SSLSecurityFlags:   Flags that control certificate verification.

The following flags are defined (specified in hexadecimal notation). They can be or-ed together to exclude multiple conditions:

0x00000001Ignore time validity status of certificate.
0x00000002Ignore time validity status of CTL.
0x00000004Ignore non-nested certificate times.
0x00000010Allow unknown Certificate Authority.
0x00000020Ignore wrong certificate usage.
0x00000100Ignore unknown certificate revocation status.
0x00000200Ignore unknown CTL signer revocation status.
0x00000400Ignore unknown Certificate Authority revocation status.
0x00000800Ignore unknown Root revocation status.
0x00008000Allow test Root certificate.
0x00004000Trust test Root certificate.
0x80000000Ignore non-matching CN (certificate CN not-matching server name).

This functionality is currently not available when the provider is OpenSSL.

Flags that control certificate verification.

The following flags are defined (specified in hexadecimal notation). They can be or-ed together to exclude multiple conditions:

0x00000001Ignore time validity status of certificate.
0x00000002Ignore time validity status of CTL.
0x00000004Ignore non-nested certificate times.
0x00000010Allow unknown Certificate Authority.
0x00000020Ignore wrong certificate usage.
0x00000100Ignore unknown certificate revocation status.
0x00000200Ignore unknown CTL signer revocation status.
0x00000400Ignore unknown Certificate Authority revocation status.
0x00000800Ignore unknown Root revocation status.
0x00008000Allow test Root certificate.
0x00004000Trust test Root certificate.
0x80000000Ignore non-matching CN (certificate CN not-matching server name).

This functionality is currently not available when the provider is OpenSSL.

SSLSecurityFlags:   Flags that control certificate verification.

The following flags are defined (specified in hexadecimal notation). They can be or-ed together to exclude multiple conditions:

0x00000001Ignore time validity status of certificate.
0x00000002Ignore time validity status of CTL.
0x00000004Ignore non-nested certificate times.
0x00000010Allow unknown Certificate Authority.
0x00000020Ignore wrong certificate usage.
0x00000100Ignore unknown certificate revocation status.
0x00000200Ignore unknown CTL signer revocation status.
0x00000400Ignore unknown Certificate Authority revocation status.
0x00000800Ignore unknown Root revocation status.
0x00008000Allow test Root certificate.
0x00004000Trust test Root certificate.
0x80000000Ignore non-matching CN (certificate CN not-matching server name).

This functionality is currently not available when the provider is OpenSSL.

Flags that control certificate verification.

The following flags are defined (specified in hexadecimal notation). They can be or-ed together to exclude multiple conditions:

0x00000001Ignore time validity status of certificate.
0x00000002Ignore time validity status of CTL.
0x00000004Ignore non-nested certificate times.
0x00000010Allow unknown Certificate Authority.
0x00000020Ignore wrong certificate usage.
0x00000100Ignore unknown certificate revocation status.
0x00000200Ignore unknown CTL signer revocation status.
0x00000400Ignore unknown Certificate Authority revocation status.
0x00000800Ignore unknown Root revocation status.
0x00008000Allow test Root certificate.
0x00004000Trust test Root certificate.
0x80000000Ignore non-matching CN (certificate CN not-matching server name).

This functionality is currently not available when the provider is OpenSSL.

SSLServerCACerts:   A newline separated list of CA certificate to use during SSL server certificate validation.

This setting optionally specifies one or more CA certificates to be used when verifying the server certificate. When verifying the server's certificate the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the server's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This setting should only be set if the server's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.

The value of this setting is a newline (CrLf) separated list of certificates. For instance:

-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw
...
eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w
F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
\r \n
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp
..
d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

A newline separated list of CA certificate to use during SSL server certificate validation.

This setting optionally specifies one or more CA certificates to be used when verifying the server certificate. When verifying the server's certificate the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the server's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This setting should only be set if the server's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.

The value of this setting is a newline (CrLf) separated list of certificates. For instance:

-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw
...
eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w
F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
\r \n
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp
..
d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

SSLServerCACerts:   A newline separated list of CA certificate to use during SSL server certificate validation.

This setting optionally specifies one or more CA certificates to be used when verifying the server certificate. When verifying the server's certificate the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the server's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This setting should only be set if the server's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.

The value of this setting is a newline (CrLf) separated list of certificates. For instance:

-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw
...
eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w
F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
\r \n
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp
..
d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

A newline separated list of CA certificate to use during SSL server certificate validation.

This setting optionally specifies one or more CA certificates to be used when verifying the server certificate. When verifying the server's certificate the certificates trusted by the system will be used as part of the verification process. If the server's CA certificates are not installed to the trusted system store, they may be specified here so they are included when performing the verification process. This setting should only be set if the server's CA certificates are not already trusted on the system and cannot be installed to the trusted system store.

The value of this setting is a newline (CrLf) separated list of certificates. For instance:

-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIEKzCCAxOgAwIBAgIRANTET4LIkxdH6P+CFIiHvTowDQYJKoZIhvcNAQELBQAw
...
eWHV5OW1K53o/atv59sOiW5K3crjFhsBOd5Q+cJJnU+SWinPKtANXMht+EDvYY2w
F0I1XhM+pKj7FjDr+XNj
-----END CERTIFICATE-----
\r \n
-----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
MIIEFjCCAv6gAwIBAgIQetu1SMxpnENAnnOz1P+PtTANBgkqhkiG9w0BAQUFADBp
..
d8q23djXZbVYiIfE9ebr4g3152BlVCHZ2GyPdjhIuLeH21VbT/dyEHHA
-----END CERTIFICATE-----

TLS12SignatureAlgorithms:   Defines the allowed TLS 1.2 signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal.

This setting specifies the allowed server certificate signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal and SSLEnabledProtocols is set to allow TLS 1.2.

When specified the class will verify that the server certificate signature algorithm is among the values specified in this setting. If the server certificate signature algorithm is unsupported the class fails with an error.

The format of this value is a comma separated list of hash-signature combinations. For instance: component.SSLProvider = TCPClientSSLProviders.sslpInternal; component.Config("SSLEnabledProtocols=3072"); //TLS 1.2 component.Config("TLS12SignatureAlgorithms=sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa"); The default value for this setting is sha512-ecdsa,sha512-rsa,sha512-dsa,sha384-ecdsa,sha384-rsa,sha384-dsa,sha256-ecdsa,sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha224-ecdsa,sha224-rsa,sha224-dsa,sha1-ecdsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa.

In order to not restrict the server's certificate signature algorithm, specify an empty string as the value for this setting, which will cause the signature_algorithms TLS 1.2 extension to not be sent.

Defines the allowed TLS 1.2 signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal.

This setting specifies the allowed server certificate signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal and SSLEnabledProtocols is set to allow TLS 1.2.

When specified the class will verify that the server certificate signature algorithm is among the values specified in this setting. If the server certificate signature algorithm is unsupported the class fails with an error.

The format of this value is a comma separated list of hash-signature combinations. For instance: component.SSLProvider = TCPClientSSLProviders.sslpInternal; component.Config("SSLEnabledProtocols=3072"); //TLS 1.2 component.Config("TLS12SignatureAlgorithms=sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa"); The default value for this setting is sha512-ecdsa,sha512-rsa,sha512-dsa,sha384-ecdsa,sha384-rsa,sha384-dsa,sha256-ecdsa,sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha224-ecdsa,sha224-rsa,sha224-dsa,sha1-ecdsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa.

In order to not restrict the server's certificate signature algorithm, specify an empty string as the value for this setting, which will cause the signature_algorithms TLS 1.2 extension to not be sent.

TLS12SignatureAlgorithms:   Defines the allowed TLS 1.2 signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal.

This setting specifies the allowed server certificate signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal and SSLEnabledProtocols is set to allow TLS 1.2.

When specified the class will verify that the server certificate signature algorithm is among the values specified in this setting. If the server certificate signature algorithm is unsupported the class fails with an error.

The format of this value is a comma separated list of hash-signature combinations. For instance: component.SSLProvider = TCPClientSSLProviders.sslpInternal; component.Config("SSLEnabledProtocols=3072"); //TLS 1.2 component.Config("TLS12SignatureAlgorithms=sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa"); The default value for this setting is sha512-ecdsa,sha512-rsa,sha512-dsa,sha384-ecdsa,sha384-rsa,sha384-dsa,sha256-ecdsa,sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha224-ecdsa,sha224-rsa,sha224-dsa,sha1-ecdsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa.

In order to not restrict the server's certificate signature algorithm, specify an empty string as the value for this setting, which will cause the signature_algorithms TLS 1.2 extension to not be sent.

Defines the allowed TLS 1.2 signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal.

This setting specifies the allowed server certificate signature algorithms when SSLProvider is set to Internal and SSLEnabledProtocols is set to allow TLS 1.2.

When specified the class will verify that the server certificate signature algorithm is among the values specified in this setting. If the server certificate signature algorithm is unsupported the class fails with an error.

The format of this value is a comma separated list of hash-signature combinations. For instance: component.SSLProvider = TCPClientSSLProviders.sslpInternal; component.Config("SSLEnabledProtocols=3072"); //TLS 1.2 component.Config("TLS12SignatureAlgorithms=sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa"); The default value for this setting is sha512-ecdsa,sha512-rsa,sha512-dsa,sha384-ecdsa,sha384-rsa,sha384-dsa,sha256-ecdsa,sha256-rsa,sha256-dsa,sha224-ecdsa,sha224-rsa,sha224-dsa,sha1-ecdsa,sha1-rsa,sha1-dsa.

In order to not restrict the server's certificate signature algorithm, specify an empty string as the value for this setting, which will cause the signature_algorithms TLS 1.2 extension to not be sent.

TLS12SupportedGroups:   The supported groups for ECC.

This setting specifies a comma separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.2 for ECC.

The default value is ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1.

When using TLS 1.2 and SSLProvider is set to Internal, the values refer to the supported groups for ECC. The following values are supported:

  • "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)

The supported groups for ECC.

This setting specifies a comma separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.2 for ECC.

The default value is ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1.

When using TLS 1.2 and SSLProvider is set to Internal, the values refer to the supported groups for ECC. The following values are supported:

  • "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)

TLS12SupportedGroups:   The supported groups for ECC.

This setting specifies a comma separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.2 for ECC.

The default value is ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1.

When using TLS 1.2 and SSLProvider is set to Internal, the values refer to the supported groups for ECC. The following values are supported:

  • "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)

The supported groups for ECC.

This setting specifies a comma separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.2 for ECC.

The default value is ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1.

When using TLS 1.2 and SSLProvider is set to Internal, the values refer to the supported groups for ECC. The following values are supported:

  • "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)

TLS13KeyShareGroups:   The groups for which to pregenerate key shares.

This setting specifies a comma separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. The groups specified here will have key share data pregenerated locally before establishing a connection. This can prevent an additional round trip during the handshake if the group is supported by the server.

The default value is set to balance common supported groups and the computational resources required to generate key shares. As a result only some groups are included by default in this setting.

Note: All supported groups can always be used during the handshake even if not listed here, but if a group is used which is not present in this list it will incur an additional round trip and time to generate the key share for that group.

In most cases this setting does not need to be modified. This should only be modified if there is a specific reason to do so.

The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072

The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:

  • "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
  • "ecdhe_x448"
  • "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp521r1"
  • "ffdhe_2048" (default)
  • "ffdhe_3072" (default)
  • "ffdhe_4096"
  • "ffdhe_6144"
  • "ffdhe_8192"

The groups for which to pregenerate key shares.

This setting specifies a comma separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. The groups specified here will have key share data pregenerated locally before establishing a connection. This can prevent an additional round trip during the handshake if the group is supported by the server.

The default value is set to balance common supported groups and the computational resources required to generate key shares. As a result only some groups are included by default in this setting.

Note: All supported groups can always be used during the handshake even if not listed here, but if a group is used which is not present in this list it will incur an additional round trip and time to generate the key share for that group.

In most cases this setting does not need to be modified. This should only be modified if there is a specific reason to do so.

The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072

The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:

  • "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
  • "ecdhe_x448"
  • "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp521r1"
  • "ffdhe_2048" (default)
  • "ffdhe_3072" (default)
  • "ffdhe_4096"
  • "ffdhe_6144"
  • "ffdhe_8192"

TLS13KeyShareGroups:   The groups for which to pregenerate key shares.

This setting specifies a comma separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. The groups specified here will have key share data pregenerated locally before establishing a connection. This can prevent an additional round trip during the handshake if the group is supported by the server.

The default value is set to balance common supported groups and the computational resources required to generate key shares. As a result only some groups are included by default in this setting.

Note: All supported groups can always be used during the handshake even if not listed here, but if a group is used which is not present in this list it will incur an additional round trip and time to generate the key share for that group.

In most cases this setting does not need to be modified. This should only be modified if there is a specific reason to do so.

The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072

The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:

  • "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
  • "ecdhe_x448"
  • "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp521r1"
  • "ffdhe_2048" (default)
  • "ffdhe_3072" (default)
  • "ffdhe_4096"
  • "ffdhe_6144"
  • "ffdhe_8192"

The groups for which to pregenerate key shares.

This setting specifies a comma separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. The groups specified here will have key share data pregenerated locally before establishing a connection. This can prevent an additional round trip during the handshake if the group is supported by the server.

The default value is set to balance common supported groups and the computational resources required to generate key shares. As a result only some groups are included by default in this setting.

Note: All supported groups can always be used during the handshake even if not listed here, but if a group is used which is not present in this list it will incur an additional round trip and time to generate the key share for that group.

In most cases this setting does not need to be modified. This should only be modified if there is a specific reason to do so.

The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072

The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:

  • "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
  • "ecdhe_x448"
  • "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp521r1"
  • "ffdhe_2048" (default)
  • "ffdhe_3072" (default)
  • "ffdhe_4096"
  • "ffdhe_6144"
  • "ffdhe_8192"

TLS13SignatureAlgorithms:   The allowed certificate signature algorithms.

This setting holds a comma separated list of allowed signature algorithms. Possible values are:

  • "ed25519" (default)
  • "ed448" (default)
  • "ecdsa_secp256r1_sha256" (default)
  • "ecdsa_secp384r1_sha384" (default)
  • "ecdsa_secp521r1_sha512" (default)
  • "rsa_pkcs1_sha256" (default)
  • "rsa_pkcs1_sha384" (default)
  • "rsa_pkcs1_sha512" (default)
  • "rsa_pss_sha256" (default)
  • "rsa_pss_sha384" (default)
  • "rsa_pss_sha512" (default)
The default value is rsa_pss_sha256,rsa_pss_sha384,rsa_pss_sha512,rsa_pkcs1_sha256,rsa_pkcs1_sha384,rsa_pkcs1_sha512,ecdsa_secp256r1_sha256,ecdsa_secp384r1_sha384,ecdsa_secp521r1_sha512,ed25519,ed448. This setting is only applicable when SSLEnabledProtocols includes TLS 1.3. The allowed certificate signature algorithms.

This setting holds a comma separated list of allowed signature algorithms. Possible values are:

  • "ed25519" (default)
  • "ed448" (default)
  • "ecdsa_secp256r1_sha256" (default)
  • "ecdsa_secp384r1_sha384" (default)
  • "ecdsa_secp521r1_sha512" (default)
  • "rsa_pkcs1_sha256" (default)
  • "rsa_pkcs1_sha384" (default)
  • "rsa_pkcs1_sha512" (default)
  • "rsa_pss_sha256" (default)
  • "rsa_pss_sha384" (default)
  • "rsa_pss_sha512" (default)
The default value is rsa_pss_sha256,rsa_pss_sha384,rsa_pss_sha512,rsa_pkcs1_sha256,rsa_pkcs1_sha384,rsa_pkcs1_sha512,ecdsa_secp256r1_sha256,ecdsa_secp384r1_sha384,ecdsa_secp521r1_sha512,ed25519,ed448. This setting is only applicable when SSLEnabledProtocols includes TLS 1.3.
TLS13SignatureAlgorithms:   The allowed certificate signature algorithms.

This setting holds a comma separated list of allowed signature algorithms. Possible values are:

  • "ed25519" (default)
  • "ed448" (default)
  • "ecdsa_secp256r1_sha256" (default)
  • "ecdsa_secp384r1_sha384" (default)
  • "ecdsa_secp521r1_sha512" (default)
  • "rsa_pkcs1_sha256" (default)
  • "rsa_pkcs1_sha384" (default)
  • "rsa_pkcs1_sha512" (default)
  • "rsa_pss_sha256" (default)
  • "rsa_pss_sha384" (default)
  • "rsa_pss_sha512" (default)
The default value is rsa_pss_sha256,rsa_pss_sha384,rsa_pss_sha512,rsa_pkcs1_sha256,rsa_pkcs1_sha384,rsa_pkcs1_sha512,ecdsa_secp256r1_sha256,ecdsa_secp384r1_sha384,ecdsa_secp521r1_sha512,ed25519,ed448. This setting is only applicable when SSLEnabledProtocols includes TLS 1.3. The allowed certificate signature algorithms.

This setting holds a comma separated list of allowed signature algorithms. Possible values are:

  • "ed25519" (default)
  • "ed448" (default)
  • "ecdsa_secp256r1_sha256" (default)
  • "ecdsa_secp384r1_sha384" (default)
  • "ecdsa_secp521r1_sha512" (default)
  • "rsa_pkcs1_sha256" (default)
  • "rsa_pkcs1_sha384" (default)
  • "rsa_pkcs1_sha512" (default)
  • "rsa_pss_sha256" (default)
  • "rsa_pss_sha384" (default)
  • "rsa_pss_sha512" (default)
The default value is rsa_pss_sha256,rsa_pss_sha384,rsa_pss_sha512,rsa_pkcs1_sha256,rsa_pkcs1_sha384,rsa_pkcs1_sha512,ecdsa_secp256r1_sha256,ecdsa_secp384r1_sha384,ecdsa_secp521r1_sha512,ed25519,ed448. This setting is only applicable when SSLEnabledProtocols includes TLS 1.3.
TLS13SupportedGroups:   The supported groups for (EC)DHE key exchange.

This setting specifies a comma separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. This setting should only be modified if there is a specific reason to do so.

The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_x448,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072,ffdhe_4096,ffdhe_6144,ffdhe_8192

The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:

  • "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
  • "ecdhe_x448" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
  • "ffdhe_2048" (default)
  • "ffdhe_3072" (default)
  • "ffdhe_4096" (default)
  • "ffdhe_6144" (default)
  • "ffdhe_8192" (default)

The supported groups for (EC)DHE key exchange.

This setting specifies a comma separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. This setting should only be modified if there is a specific reason to do so.

The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_x448,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072,ffdhe_4096,ffdhe_6144,ffdhe_8192

The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:

  • "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
  • "ecdhe_x448" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
  • "ffdhe_2048" (default)
  • "ffdhe_3072" (default)
  • "ffdhe_4096" (default)
  • "ffdhe_6144" (default)
  • "ffdhe_8192" (default)

TLS13SupportedGroups:   The supported groups for (EC)DHE key exchange.

This setting specifies a comma separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. This setting should only be modified if there is a specific reason to do so.

The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_x448,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072,ffdhe_4096,ffdhe_6144,ffdhe_8192

The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:

  • "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
  • "ecdhe_x448" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
  • "ffdhe_2048" (default)
  • "ffdhe_3072" (default)
  • "ffdhe_4096" (default)
  • "ffdhe_6144" (default)
  • "ffdhe_8192" (default)

The supported groups for (EC)DHE key exchange.

This setting specifies a comma separated list of named groups used in TLS 1.3 for key exchange. This setting should only be modified if there is a specific reason to do so.

The default value is ecdhe_x25519,ecdhe_x448,ecdhe_secp256r1,ecdhe_secp384r1,ecdhe_secp521r1,ffdhe_2048,ffdhe_3072,ffdhe_4096,ffdhe_6144,ffdhe_8192

The values are ordered from most preferred to least preferred. The following values are supported:

  • "ecdhe_x25519" (default)
  • "ecdhe_x448" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp256r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp384r1" (default)
  • "ecdhe_secp521r1" (default)
  • "ffdhe_2048" (default)
  • "ffdhe_3072" (default)
  • "ffdhe_4096" (default)
  • "ffdhe_6144" (default)
  • "ffdhe_8192" (default)

Socket Config Settings

AbsoluteTimeout:   Determines whether timeouts are inactivity timeouts or absolute timeouts.

If AbsoluteTimeout is set to True, any method which does not complete within Timeout seconds will be aborted. By default, AbsoluteTimeout is False, and the timeout is an inactivity timeout.

Note: This option is not valid for UDP ports.

Determines whether timeouts are inactivity timeouts or absolute timeouts.

If AbsoluteTimeout is set to True, any method which does not complete within Timeout seconds will be aborted. By default, AbsoluteTimeout is False, and the timeout is an inactivity timeout.

Note: This option is not valid for UDP ports.

AbsoluteTimeout:   Determines whether timeouts are inactivity timeouts or absolute timeouts.

If AbsoluteTimeout is set to True, any method which does not complete within Timeout seconds will be aborted. By default, AbsoluteTimeout is False, and the timeout is an inactivity timeout.

Note: This option is not valid for UDP ports.

Determines whether timeouts are inactivity timeouts or absolute timeouts.

If AbsoluteTimeout is set to True, any method which does not complete within Timeout seconds will be aborted. By default, AbsoluteTimeout is False, and the timeout is an inactivity timeout.

Note: This option is not valid for UDP ports.

FirewallData:   Used to send extra data to the firewall.

When the firewall is a tunneling proxy, use this property to send custom (additional) headers to the firewall (e.g. headers for custom authentication schemes). Used to send extra data to the firewall.

When the firewall is a tunneling proxy, use this property to send custom (additional) headers to the firewall (e.g. headers for custom authentication schemes).

FirewallData:   Used to send extra data to the firewall.

When the firewall is a tunneling proxy, use this property to send custom (additional) headers to the firewall (e.g. headers for custom authentication schemes). Used to send extra data to the firewall.

When the firewall is a tunneling proxy, use this property to send custom (additional) headers to the firewall (e.g. headers for custom authentication schemes).

InBufferSize:   The size in bytes of the incoming queue of the socket.

This is the size of an internal queue in the TCP/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be receiving. Increasing the value of the InBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance in some cases.

Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the InBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.

The size in bytes of the incoming queue of the socket.

This is the size of an internal queue in the TCP/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be receiving. Increasing the value of the InBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance in some cases.

Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the InBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.

InBufferSize:   The size in bytes of the incoming queue of the socket.

This is the size of an internal queue in the TCP/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be receiving. Increasing the value of the InBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance in some cases.

Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the InBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.

The size in bytes of the incoming queue of the socket.

This is the size of an internal queue in the TCP/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be receiving. Increasing the value of the InBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance in some cases.

Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the InBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.

OutBufferSize:   The size in bytes of the outgoing queue of the socket.

This is the size of an internal queue in the TCP/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be sending. Increasing the value of the OutBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance in some cases.

Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the OutBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.

The size in bytes of the outgoing queue of the socket.

This is the size of an internal queue in the TCP/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be sending. Increasing the value of the OutBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance in some cases.

Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the OutBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.

OutBufferSize:   The size in bytes of the outgoing queue of the socket.

This is the size of an internal queue in the TCP/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be sending. Increasing the value of the OutBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance in some cases.

Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the OutBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.

The size in bytes of the outgoing queue of the socket.

This is the size of an internal queue in the TCP/IP stack. You can increase or decrease its size depending on the amount of data that you will be sending. Increasing the value of the OutBufferSize setting can provide significant improvements in performance in some cases.

Some TCP/IP implementations do not support variable buffer sizes. If that is the case, when the class is activated the OutBufferSize reverts to its defined size. The same happens if you attempt to make it too large or too small.

Base Config Settings

BuildInfo:   Information about the product's build.

When queried, this setting will return a string containing information about the product's build.

CodePage:   The system code page used for Unicode to Multibyte translations.

The default code page is Unicode UTF-8 (65001).

The following is a list of valid code page identifiers:

IdentifierName
037IBM EBCDIC - U.S./Canada
437OEM - United States
500IBM EBCDIC - International
708Arabic - ASMO 708
709Arabic - ASMO 449+, BCON V4
710Arabic - Transparent Arabic
720Arabic - Transparent ASMO
737OEM - Greek (formerly 437G)
775OEM - Baltic
850OEM - Multilingual Latin I
852OEM - Latin II
855OEM - Cyrillic (primarily Russian)
857OEM - Turkish
858OEM - Multilingual Latin I + Euro symbol
860OEM - Portuguese
861OEM - Icelandic
862OEM - Hebrew
863OEM - Canadian-French
864OEM - Arabic
865OEM - Nordic
866OEM - Russian
869OEM - Modern Greek
870IBM EBCDIC - Multilingual/ROECE (Latin-2)
874ANSI/OEM - Thai (same as 28605, ISO 8859-15)
875IBM EBCDIC - Modern Greek
932ANSI/OEM - Japanese, Shift-JIS
936ANSI/OEM - Simplified Chinese (PRC, Singapore)
949ANSI/OEM - Korean (Unified Hangul Code)
950ANSI/OEM - Traditional Chinese (Taiwan; Hong Kong SAR, PRC)
1026IBM EBCDIC - Turkish (Latin-5)
1047IBM EBCDIC - Latin 1/Open System
1140IBM EBCDIC - U.S./Canada (037 + Euro symbol)
1141IBM EBCDIC - Germany (20273 + Euro symbol)
1142IBM EBCDIC - Denmark/Norway (20277 + Euro symbol)
1143IBM EBCDIC - Finland/Sweden (20278 + Euro symbol)
1144IBM EBCDIC - Italy (20280 + Euro symbol)
1145IBM EBCDIC - Latin America/Spain (20284 + Euro symbol)
1146IBM EBCDIC - United Kingdom (20285 + Euro symbol)
1147IBM EBCDIC - France (20297 + Euro symbol)
1148IBM EBCDIC - International (500 + Euro symbol)
1149IBM EBCDIC - Icelandic (20871 + Euro symbol)
1200Unicode UCS-2 Little-Endian (BMP of ISO 10646)
1201Unicode UCS-2 Big-Endian
1250ANSI - Central European
1251ANSI - Cyrillic
1252ANSI - Latin I
1253ANSI - Greek
1254ANSI - Turkish
1255ANSI - Hebrew
1256ANSI - Arabic
1257ANSI - Baltic
1258ANSI/OEM - Vietnamese
1361Korean (Johab)
10000MAC - Roman
10001MAC - Japanese
10002MAC - Traditional Chinese (Big5)
10003MAC - Korean
10004MAC - Arabic
10005MAC - Hebrew
10006MAC - Greek I
10007MAC - Cyrillic
10008MAC - Simplified Chinese (GB 2312)
10010MAC - Romania
10017MAC - Ukraine
10021MAC - Thai
10029MAC - Latin II
10079MAC - Icelandic
10081MAC - Turkish
10082MAC - Croatia
12000Unicode UCS-4 Little-Endian
12001Unicode UCS-4 Big-Endian
20000CNS - Taiwan
20001TCA - Taiwan
20002Eten - Taiwan
20003IBM5550 - Taiwan
20004TeleText - Taiwan
20005Wang - Taiwan
20105IA5 IRV International Alphabet No. 5 (7-bit)
20106IA5 German (7-bit)
20107IA5 Swedish (7-bit)
20108IA5 Norwegian (7-bit)
20127US-ASCII (7-bit)
20261T.61
20269ISO 6937 Non-Spacing Accent
20273IBM EBCDIC - Germany
20277IBM EBCDIC - Denmark/Norway
20278IBM EBCDIC - Finland/Sweden
20280IBM EBCDIC - Italy
20284IBM EBCDIC - Latin America/Spain
20285IBM EBCDIC - United Kingdom
20290IBM EBCDIC - Japanese Katakana Extended
20297IBM EBCDIC - France
20420IBM EBCDIC - Arabic
20423IBM EBCDIC - Greek
20424IBM EBCDIC - Hebrew
20833IBM EBCDIC - Korean Extended
20838IBM EBCDIC - Thai
20866Russian - KOI8-R
20871IBM EBCDIC - Icelandic
20880IBM EBCDIC - Cyrillic (Russian)
20905IBM EBCDIC - Turkish
20924IBM EBCDIC - Latin-1/Open System (1047 + Euro symbol)
20932JIS X 0208-1990 & 0121-1990
20936Simplified Chinese (GB2312)
21025IBM EBCDIC - Cyrillic (Serbian, Bulgarian)
21027Extended Alpha Lowercase
21866Ukrainian (KOI8-U)
28591ISO 8859-1 Latin I
28592ISO 8859-2 Central Europe
28593ISO 8859-3 Latin 3
28594ISO 8859-4 Baltic
28595ISO 8859-5 Cyrillic
28596ISO 8859-6 Arabic
28597ISO 8859-7 Greek
28598ISO 8859-8 Hebrew
28599ISO 8859-9 Latin 5
28605ISO 8859-15 Latin 9
29001Europa 3
38598ISO 8859-8 Hebrew
50220ISO 2022 Japanese with no halfwidth Katakana
50221ISO 2022 Japanese with halfwidth Katakana
50222ISO 2022 Japanese JIS X 0201-1989
50225ISO 2022 Korean
50227ISO 2022 Simplified Chinese
50229ISO 2022 Traditional Chinese
50930Japanese (Katakana) Extended
50931US/Canada and Japanese
50933Korean Extended and Korean
50935Simplified Chinese Extended and Simplified Chinese
50936Simplified Chinese
50937US/Canada and Traditional Chinese
50939Japanese (Latin) Extended and Japanese
51932EUC - Japanese
51936EUC - Simplified Chinese
51949EUC - Korean
51950EUC - Traditional Chinese
52936HZ-GB2312 Simplified Chinese
54936Windows XP: GB18030 Simplified Chinese (4 Byte)
57002ISCII Devanagari
57003ISCII Bengali
57004ISCII Tamil
57005ISCII Telugu
57006ISCII Assamese
57007ISCII Oriya
57008ISCII Kannada
57009ISCII Malayalam
57010ISCII Gujarati
57011ISCII Punjabi
65000Unicode UTF-7
65001Unicode UTF-8
The following is a list of valid code page identifiers for Mac OS only:
IdentifierName
1ASCII
2NEXTSTEP
3JapaneseEUC
4UTF8
5ISOLatin1
6Symbol
7NonLossyASCII
8ShiftJIS
9ISOLatin2
10Unicode
11WindowsCP1251
12WindowsCP1252
13WindowsCP1253
14WindowsCP1254
15WindowsCP1250
21ISO2022JP
30MacOSRoman
10UTF16String
0x90000100UTF16BigEndian
0x94000100UTF16LittleEndian
0x8c000100UTF32String
0x98000100UTF32BigEndian
0x9c000100UTF32LittleEndian
65536Proprietary

LicenseInfo:   Information about the current license.

When queried, this setting will return a string containing information about the license this instance of a class is using. It will return the following information:

  • Product: The product the license is for.
  • Product Key: The key the license was generated from.
  • License Source: Where the license was found (e.g., RuntimeLicense, License File).
  • License Type: The type of license installed (e.g., Royalty Free, Single Server).
  • Last Valid Build: The last valid build number for which the license will work.
MaskSensitive:   Whether sensitive data is masked in log messages.

In certain circumstances it may be beneficial to mask sensitive data, like passwords, in log messages. Set this to true to mask sensitive data. The default is true.

This setting only works on these classes: AS3Receiver, AS3Sender, Atom, Client(3DS), FTP, FTPServer, IMAP, OFTPClient, SSHClient, SCP, Server(3DS), Sexec, SFTP, SFTPServer, SSHServer, TCPClient, TCPServer.

ProcessIdleEvents:   Whether the class uses its internal event loop to process events when the main thread is idle.

If set to False, the class will not fire internal idle events. Set this to False to use the class in a background thread on Mac OS. By default, this setting is True.

SelectWaitMillis:   The length of time in milliseconds the class will wait when DoEvents is called if there are no events to process.

If there are no events to process when DoEvents is called, the class will wait for the amount of time specified here before returning. The default value is 20.

UseInternalSecurityAPI:   Whether or not to use the system security libraries or an internal implementation.

When set to false, the class will use the system security libraries by default to perform cryptographic functions where applicable.

Setting this configuration setting to true tells the class to use the internal implementation instead of using the system security libraries.

On Windows, this setting is set to false by default. On Linux/macOS, this setting is set to true by default.

To use the system security libraries for Linux, OpenSSL support must be enabled. For more information on how to enable OpenSSL, please refer to the OpenSSL Notes section.

Trappable Errors (FDMSRcRetail Class)

Error Handling (C++)

Call the GetLastErrorCode() method to obtain the last called method's result code; 0 indicates success, while a non-zero error code indicates that this method encountered an error during its execution. Known error codes are listed below. If an error occurs, the GetLastError() method can be called to retrieve the associated error message.

FDMSRcRetail Errors

432   Invalid index.
501   Invalid length for this property.
502   Invalid data format for this property.
503   Value is out of range.
504   Credit card digit check failed.
505   Card date invalid.
506   Card expired.
519   Corrupt response.
520   Response payload empty.
521   Response truncated.
526   Invalid timeout value.
593   A property required for this transaction is missing.
529   Error in XML response.
530   Status code received in response indicates an error condition.
531   Return code received in response indicates an error condition.
532   Cannot generate detail aggregate - this transaction was not successfully authorized.
533   Internal error constructing payload.

The class may also return one of the following error codes, which are inherited from other classes.

HTTP Errors

118   Firewall Error. Error description contains detailed message.
143   Busy executing current method.
151   HTTP protocol error. The error message has the server response.
152   No server specified in URL
153   Specified URLScheme is invalid.
155   Range operation is not supported by server.
156   Invalid cookie index (out of range).
301   Interrupted.
302   Can't open AttachedFile.

The class may also return one of the following error codes, which are inherited from other classes.

TCPClient Errors

100   You cannot change the RemotePort at this time. A connection is in progress.
101   You cannot change the RemoteHost (Server) at this time. A connection is in progress.
102   The RemoteHost address is invalid (0.0.0.0).
104   Already connected. If you want to reconnect, close the current connection first.
106   You cannot change the LocalPort at this time. A connection is in progress.
107   You cannot change the LocalHost at this time. A connection is in progress.
112   You cannot change MaxLineLength at this time. A connection is in progress.
116   RemotePort cannot be zero. Please specify a valid service port number.
117   You cannot change the UseConnection option while the class is active.
135   Operation would block.
201   Timeout.
211   Action impossible in control's present state.
212   Action impossible while not connected.
213   Action impossible while listening.
301   Timeout.
302   Could not open file.
434   Unable to convert string to selected CodePage.
1105   Already connecting. If you want to reconnect, close the current connection first.
1117   You need to connect first.
1119   You cannot change the LocalHost at this time. A connection is in progress.
1120   Connection dropped by remote host.

SSL Errors

270   Cannot load specified security library.
271   Cannot open certificate store.
272   Cannot find specified certificate.
273   Cannot acquire security credentials.
274   Cannot find certificate chain.
275   Cannot verify certificate chain.
276   Error during handshake.
280   Error verifying certificate.
281   Could not find client certificate.
282   Could not find server certificate.
283   Error encrypting data.
284   Error decrypting data.

TCP/IP Errors

10004   [10004] Interrupted system call.
10009   [10009] Bad file number.
10013   [10013] Access denied.
10014   [10014] Bad address.
10022   [10022] Invalid argument.
10024   [10024] Too many open files.
10035   [10035] Operation would block.
10036   [10036] Operation now in progress.
10037   [10037] Operation already in progress.
10038   [10038] Socket operation on non-socket.
10039   [10039] Destination address required.
10040   [10040] Message too long.
10041   [10041] Protocol wrong type for socket.
10042   [10042] Bad protocol option.
10043   [10043] Protocol not supported.
10044   [10044] Socket type not supported.
10045   [10045] Operation not supported on socket.
10046   [10046] Protocol family not supported.
10047   [10047] Address family not supported by protocol family.
10048   [10048] Address already in use.
10049   [10049] Can't assign requested address.
10050   [10050] Network is down.
10051   [10051] Network is unreachable.
10052   [10052] Net dropped connection or reset.
10053   [10053] Software caused connection abort.
10054   [10054] Connection reset by peer.
10055   [10055] No buffer space available.
10056   [10056] Socket is already connected.
10057   [10057] Socket is not connected.
10058   [10058] Can't send after socket shutdown.
10059   [10059] Too many references, can't splice.
10060   [10060] Connection timed out.
10061   [10061] Connection refused.
10062   [10062] Too many levels of symbolic links.
10063   [10063] File name too long.
10064   [10064] Host is down.
10065   [10065] No route to host.
10066   [10066] Directory not empty
10067   [10067] Too many processes.
10068   [10068] Too many users.
10069   [10069] Disc Quota Exceeded.
10070   [10070] Stale NFS file handle.
10071   [10071] Too many levels of remote in path.
10091   [10091] Network subsystem is unavailable.
10092   [10092] WINSOCK DLL Version out of range.
10093   [10093] Winsock not loaded yet.
11001   [11001] Host not found.
11002   [11002] Non-authoritative 'Host not found' (try again or check DNS setup).
11003   [11003] Non-recoverable errors: FORMERR, REFUSED, NOTIMP.
11004   [11004] Valid name, no data record (check DNS setup).